JVC Car Stereo System GET0576 001A User Manual

CD RECEIVER

KD-R400

RECEPTOR CON CD

RÉCEPTEUR CD

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7.

Para cancelar la demostración en pantalla, consulte la página 7.

Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 7.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.

Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.

For customer Use:

Enter below the Model

No. and Serial No. which

are located on the top or

bottom of the cabinet. Retain

this information for future

reference.

INSTRUCTIONS

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS

Model No.

Serial No.

GET0576-001A

[J]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Detaching the control panel

CONTENTS

Detaching the control panel.........................

Attaching the control panel .........................

How to reset your unit .................................

How to forcibly eject a disc...........................

OPERATIONS

Basic operations...........................................

• Using the control panel...............................

• Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)......

Preparation..................................................

Listening to the radio...................................

Disc operations.............................................

Attaching the control panel

How to reset your unit

Listening to the USB device.......................... 10

EXTERNAL DEVICES

Listening to the other external

components.............................................. 11

SETTINGS

Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 12

Title assignment .......................................... 13

Menu operations.......................................... 14

Color settings............................................... 17

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

REFERENCES

How to forcibly eject a disc

More about this unit .................................... 18

Troubleshooting........................................... 21

Maintenance................................................ 23

Specifications............................................... 24

• You can forcibly eject the loaded disc even if the disc is

locked. To lock/unlock the disc, see page 9.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

This mark is used to indicate...

Turn the control dial to make a

selection, then press to confirm the

selection.

Caution on volume setting:

Digital devices (CD/USB) produce very little noise

compared with other sources. Lower the volume before

playing these digital sources to avoid damaging the

speakers by sudden increase of the output level.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic operations

Using the control panel

• FM/AM: Select preset station.

• CD/USB: Select folder.

• Turn on the power.

• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).

• Turn off the power [Hold].

Select the source.

FM = AM*²= CD*³= USB = AUX IN*²=

(back to the beginning)

Select the sound mode.

Detach the panel.

Change the display information.

• FM/AM: Search for station.

• CD/USB: Select track.

Return to the previous menu.

Remote sensor

AUX (auxiliary) input jack

USB (Universal Serial Bus) input jack

• Enter list operations.

• Enter Menu setting [Hold].

• Control the volume*⁴or select items [Turn].

• Confirm the selection [Press].

• FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].

• CD/USB: Enter playback mode [Hold].

Pause/resume playback*⁴[Press].

Loading slot

Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.

You cannot select these sources if they were disabled

in the Menu (see “SRC SELECT” in “Menu

operations” on page 16).

You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no

disc is in the unit.

Display window

Eject disc.

You can still adjust the volume during pause when

the selected source is CD/USB.

Before resume playback, check to be sure that you

have not raise the volume level too much.

You can change the display and button illumination (see “COLOR” on page 15).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display window

Tr (track) indicator

Source display / Track number / Folder number /

Time countdown indicator

DISC indicator

Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,

ROCK, POPS, USER

EQ (equalizer) indicator

LOUD (loudness) indicator

Disc information indicators—

TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)

Main display

Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),

MO (monaural)

Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),

(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)

OPERATIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)

Installing the lithium coin battery (CR2025)

For USA-California Only:

This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery

which contains Perchlorate Material—special

handling may apply.

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is on.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

• Changes the preset stations.

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.

Adjusts the volume level.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

Caution:

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire, or the like.

Selects the sound mode.

Selects the source.

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and

held.

If the effectiveness of the remote controller

decreases, replace the battery.

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

Before using the remote controller:

• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote

sensor on the unit.

Warning (to prevent accidents and damage):

• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light

(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its

equivalent.

• Do not leave the remote controller in a place (such

as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight for a long

time.

• Store the battery in a place where children cannot

reach.

• Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery,

or dispose of it in a fire.

• Do not leave the battery with other metallic

materials.

Remote sensor

This unit is equipped with the steering wheel

remote control function.

• Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar

tools.

• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate

volume) for connection.

• Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when

throwing away or saving it.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preparation

Canceling the display demonstration and setting the clock

• See also page 14.

Turn on the power.

Cancel the display demonstrations

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”

Set the clock

Select “CLOCK” = “CLOCK SET.”

Press and hold until

the main menu is

called up.

Adjust the hour, then press control dial once to proceed to adjust

the minute.

[Turn] = [Press]

Repeat this

procedure.

•

• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.

Changing the display information

When the power is turned off: The current clock time is displayed if “CLOCK DISP” is set to “CLOCK OFF,”

(see page 14).

When the power is turned on: The display information of the current source changes as follows:

FM/AM

Frequency = Clock = Station name*¹= (back to the beginning)

Audio CD/CD Text: Disc title/performer*²= Track title*²= Current track number with the

elapsed playing time = Current track number with the clock time =

(back to the beginning)

CD/USB

MP3/WMA:

Album name/performer (folder name)*³= Track title (file name)*³=

Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current track

number with the clock time = (back to the beginning)

If no title is assigned to a station, “NO NAME” appears. To assign a title to a station, see page 13.

If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.

If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF” (see page 14),

folder name and file name appear.

OPERATIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Listening to the radio

Select “FM” or “AM.”

Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.

When a station is tuned in, searching stops. To stop searching, press the same

button again.

• You can also search for a station manually—Manual Search. Hold either one of

the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.

• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, the ST

indicator lights up on the display.

Improving the FM reception

Storing stations in memory

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive,

activate monaural mode for better reception.

• See also page 15.

Automatic presetting (FM)—SSM (Strong-

station Sequential Memory)

You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.

While listening to a station...

[Turn] = [Press]

Select the preset number range you want to

store.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.

• The MO indicator lights up on the display.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator

goes off.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically.

• To stop searching, press 4 /¢

To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual presetting (FM/AM)

You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations

for AM.

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset

number “04.”

Selecting preset station

Select preset number “04.”

[Turn] = [Press]

Disc operations

Turn on the power.

Insert a disc.

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change

the source or eject the disc.

Stop playing and ejecting the disc

Selecting a track/folder

• “NO DISC” appears. Press SRC to listen to another

playback source.

Prohibiting disc ejection

[Turn] = [Press]

• For MP3/WMA discs, select the desired folder,

then the desired track by repeating the control dial

procedures.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.

Continued on the next page

OPERATIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you

to...

• To cancel repeat play or random play, select

“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”

[Press]Pause/resume playback.

• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.

Listening to the USB

device

MP3/WMA: Select folder

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB

device.

[Press]Select track

[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the

source or detach the USB device.

Selecting the playback modes

You can use only one of the following playback modes

USB input jack

at a time.

[Turn] = [Press]

REPEAT Ô RANDOM

[Turn] = [Press]

USB memory

REPEAT

TRACK RPT

Repeats current track

If a USB device has been attached...

FOLDER RPT

MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder

RANDOM

Playback starts from where it has been stopped

previously.

• If a different USB device is currently attached,

playback starts from the beginning.

FOLDER RND

MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all

tracks of current folder, then

tracks of next folders

ALL RND

Randomly plays all tracks

10 OPERATIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• This unit may not be able to play the files depending

on the type of USB device.

• Operation and power supply may not work as

intended for some USB devices.

To stop play and detach the USB device

Straightly pull it out from the unit.

• Press SRC to listen to another playback source.

• You cannot connect a computer to the USB input

terminal of the unit.

• Make sure all important data has been backed up to

avoid losing the data.

• Do not leave a USB device in the car, expose to direct

sunlight, or high temperature to avoid deformation

or cause damages to the device.

• Some USB devices may not work immediately after

you turn on the power.

You can operate the USB device in the same way you

operate the files on a disc. (See pages 9 and 10.)

Cautions:

• Avoid using the USB device if it might hinder your

safety driving.

• Do not pull out and attach the USB device repeatedly

while “READING” is shown on the display.

• Do not start the car engine if a USB device is

connected.

• For more details about USB operations, see pages 19

and 20.

Listening to the other external components

You can connect an external component to AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.

Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting, see page 16.

Select “AUX IN.”

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

Adjust the volume.

—

Adjust the sound as you want (see pages 12 and 13).

—

Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack

Portable audio player, etc.

3.5 mm (3/16”) stereo mini plug

(not supplied)

OPERATIONS & EXTERNAL DEVICES 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting a preset sound mode

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.

• See also page 14.

Selecting from Menu.

[Turn] = [Press]

• See below and page 13 for “USER” settings.

Preset value setting for each sound mode

Preset value

Sound

BASS

MIDDLE

Freq. Level

TREBLE

LOUD

mode

(loudness)

Freq. Level

USER

ROCK

CLASSIC

POPS

HIP HOP

JAZZ

60 Hz

100 Hz

80 Hz

100 Hz

60 Hz

00 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

+03 Q1.0 1.0 kHz

+01 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

+02 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

+04 Q1.0 1.0 kHz

+03 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

00 Q1.0 10.0 kHz

00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz

+01 Q1.25 10.0 kHz

–02 Q1.0 10.0 kHz

00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz

+02

+03

+02

+01

+03

—

OFF

80 Hz

Freq.: Frequency Q: Q-slope

Storing your own sound mode

You can store your own adjustments in memory.

While “USER” is shown on the display...

Select “USER” for “EQ.”

[Turn] = [Press]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select a tone.

Title assignment

You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and

[Turn] = [Press]

AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.

Select “FM” or “AM.”

Adjust the sound elements of the selected

tone.

Show the title entry screen.

[Turn] = [Press]

Adjust the frequency.

Adjust the level.

Adjust the Q-slope.

Assign a title.

Select a character.

Range/selectable items

BASS MIDDLE TREBLE

Sound

elements

Frequency

60 Hz

80 Hz

0.5 kHz 10.0 kHz

1.0 kHz 12.5 kHz

100 Hz 1.5 kHz 15.0 kHz

200 Hz 2.5 kHz 17.5 kHz

Move to the next (or previous) character

position.

Level

–06 to –06 to –06 to

+06

Q1.0

Q1.25

Q1.5

Q2.0

Q0.75

Q1.0

Q1.25

Fixed

Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish

entering the title.

Finish the procedure.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other sound

characteristics.

The adjustment made will be stored automatically.

To erase the entire title

In step 2 above...

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And}S_DE_oT_wT_nI_loN_aG_d.S 13

Menu operations

Call up the menu.

Select the desired item.

[Turn] = [Press]

Repeat step 2 if necessary.

• To return to the previous menu,

press BACK.

• To exit from the menu, press

DISP or MENU.

Initial: Underlined

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DEMO

Display

demonstration

CLOCK DISP*¹

• DEMO ON

Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [7].

Cancels.

• DEMO OFF

• CLOCK ON

Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the

power is turned off.

Clock display

• CLOCK OFF

Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about

5 seconds when the power is turned off, [7].

CLOCK SET

Clock setting

Adjust the hour, then the minute, [7].

(Initial: 1:00)

Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.

Equalizer

USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ

DIMMER

Dimmer

• DIMMER ON

• DIMMER OFF

Dims the display and button illumination.

Cancels.

SCROLL*²

Scroll

• SCROLL ONCE

• SCROLL AUTO

• SCROLL OFF

Scrolls the displayed information once.

Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).

Cancels.

Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the

setting.

TAG DISPLAY

• TAG ON

Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA

Tag display

tracks.

• TAG OFF

Cancels.

If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select

“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

AREA

Tuner channel

interval

• AREA US

• AREA EU

• AREA SA

When using in North/Central/South America. AM/FM

intervals are set to 10 kHz/200 kHz.

When using in any other areas. AM/FM intervals are set to

9 kHz/50 kHz (100 kHz during auto search).

When using in South American countries where FM interval

is 100 kHz. AM interval is set to 10 kHz.

MONO*³

Monaural mode

• MONO ON

Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but

stereo effect will be lost, [8].

• MONO OFF

• AUTO

Restore the stereo effect.

IF BAND

Intermediate

frequency band

Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises

between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)

Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but

sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect

will remain.

• WIDE

COLOR 01

– COLOR 29,

USER

Select one of the preset or user color for display and button (except EQ/

/0) illumination.

(For customize color settings, “USER,” see page 17.)

MENU COLOR

Menu color

• OFF

• ON

Cancels.

Changes the display and button (except EQ/

/0)

illumination during menu, list search and playback mode

operations.

FADER*^4,*⁵

Fader

BALANCE*⁵

Balance

R06 – F06

L06 – R06

Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.

(Initial: 00)

Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.

(Initial: 00)

LOUD

Loudness

• LOUD OFF

• LOUD ON

Cancels.

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced

sound at a low volume level.

Displayed only when the source is “FM.”

If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”

This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.

Continued on the next page

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And}S_DE_oT_wT_nI_loN_aG_d.S 15

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

VOL ADJUST

Volume adjust

VOL ADJ –05

—

VOL ADJ +05

(Initial: VOL

ADJ 00)

Preset the volume adjustment level of each source (except

FM), compared to the FM volume level. The volume level

will automatically increase or decrease when you change the

source.

• Before making an adjustment, select the source you want to

adjust.

• “VOL ADJ FIX” appears on the display if “FM” is selected as

the source.

L/O MODE

Line output

mode

• SUB.W

• REAR

Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting

a subwoofer (through an external amplifier).

Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting

the speakers (through an external amplifier).

SUB.W FREQ*⁶• LOW

Frequencies lower than 72 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

Frequencies lower than 111 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

Frequencies lower than 157 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

Subwoofer

• MID

cutoff frequency • HIGH

SUB.W LEVEL*⁶SUB.W 00

Subwoofer level — SUB.W 08

Adjust the subwoofer output level.

(Initial: SUB.W 04)

BEEP

• BEEP OFF

Deactivates the key touch tone.

Activates the key touch tone.

Key touch tone • BEEP ON

AMP GAIN*⁷

Amplifier gain

control

• LOW POWER

VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power

of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the

speaker.)

• HIGH POWER

VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50

AM*⁸

AM station

• AM OFF

• AM ON

Disable “AM” in source selection.

Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].

AUX IN*⁹

Auxiliary input • AUX ON

• AUX OFF

Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.

Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].

Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”

The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level

set higher than “VOLUME 30.”

Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.

Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Color settings

Creating your own color

—USER Color

You can create your own colors—“DAY COLOR” or

“NIGHT COLOR.”

DAY COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to

“DIMMER OFF.”

NIGHT COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to

“DIMMER ON.”

Select a primary color.

[Turn] = [Press]

Adjust the level (00 to 31) of the selected

primary color.

[Turn] = [Press]

Select “COLOR” = “USER.”

[Turn] = [Press]

If “00” is selected for all the primary colors, nothing

appear on the display.

Repeat steps 5 and 6 to adjust other primary

colors.

While “USER” is shown on the display...

Exit from the setting.

• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the

operation will be canceled.

[Turn] = [Press]

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And}S_DE_oT_wT_nI_loN_aG_d.S 17

More about this unit

Basic operations

Disc operations

Turning on the power

Caution for DualDisc playback

• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn

on the power. If the source is ready, playback also

starts.

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply

with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.

Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on

this product may not be recommended.

Turning off the power

General

• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,

playback will start from where it had been stopped

previously next time you turn on the power.

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs

(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA

formats.

General

• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and

“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to

eject the disc.

• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are

used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or

WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.

• If you change the source while listening to a disc,

playback stops.

Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,

playback will start from where it had been stopped

previously.

• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after

pressing MENU button, the operation will be

canceled.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can only play back files of the same type as

those detected first if a disc includes both audio CD

(CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,

unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this

unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the

following reasons:

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

• During SSM search...

– All previously stored stations are erased and the

stations are stored anew.

– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest

preset number will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the previously

preset station is erased when a new station is stored

in the same preset number.

– Discs are dirty or scratched.

– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens

inside the unit.

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the

“Packet Write” method.

– There are improper recording conditions (missing

data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,

warped, etc.).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the

reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular

CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck

to the surface.

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an

ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperature or high

humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the

unit.

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,

255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable

bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the

elapsed time display, and do not show the actual

elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes

noticeable after performing the search function.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and

voice format.

– WMA files which are not based upon Windows

Media® Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is not

constant.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of

the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums, artists

(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No

other characters can be correctly displayed.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the

conditions below:

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB device

• While playing from a USB device, the playback order

may differ from other players.

– Bit rate of MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of MP3:

• This unit may be unable to play back some USB

devices or some files due to their characteristics or

recording conditions.

• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and

connection ports, some USB devices may not be

attached properly or the connection might be loose.

• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the unit

at a time. Do not use a USB hub.

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (for MPEG-1)

16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Bit rate of WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of WMA: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,

Joliet, Windows extension.

• The maximum number of characters for file/folder

names vary depending on the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

• If the connected USB device does not have the correct

files, “CANNOT PLAY” appears.

• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo: up to 64 characters

– Joliet: up to 32 characters

– Windows extension: up to 64 characters

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the

conditions below:

– Bit rate of MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of MP3:

Ejecting a disc or removing a USB device

• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,

it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again

to protect it from dust.

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (for MPEG-1)

16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Bit rate of WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of WMA: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR

(variable bit rate).

• The maximum number of characters for:

– Folder names : 32 characters

• After ejecting a disc or removing a USB device,

“NO DISC” or “NO USB“ appears and you cannot

operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,

reattach a USB device, or press SRC to select another

playback source.

Title assignment

• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station

frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted

titles before assignment.

– File names : 32 characters

– MP3 Tag : 64 characters

– WMA Tag : 32 characters

• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files, 255

folders (255 files per folder including folder without

unsupported files), and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit does not support SD card reader.

• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating

is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.

• USB devices equipped with special functions such as

data security functions cannot be used with the unit.

• Do not use a USB device with 2 or more partitions.

• This unit may not recognized a USB device connected

through a USB card reader.

Menu operations

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from

“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while

the volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,”

the unit automatically changes the volume level to

“VOLUME 30.”

• This unit may not play back files in a USB device

properly when using a USB extension cord.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and

voice format.

– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

• The unit does not work at all.

• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.

Reset the unit (see page 3).

Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see

page 16).

• Nothing appear on the display.

Check the USER Color settings (see page 17)

• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

• “AM” cannot be selected.

Connect the antenna firmly.

Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see

page 16).

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be

skipped.

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which

you used for recording.

• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Check the cords and connections.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.

• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately

on the display.

Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format

compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or

Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the

file names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or

WMA tracks.)

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• A longer readout time is required

Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.

(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).

• Tracks do not play back in the order you

have intended them to play.

The playback order is determined when the files are

recorded.

• The elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by

how the tracks are recorded on the disc.

• “NO FILE” appears on the display.

Selected folder is an empty folder*. Select another folder

that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains

data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.

• The correct characters are not displayed

(e.g. album name).

This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,

and a limited number of symbols.

• Noise is generated.

The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to

another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or

<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

• “READING” keeps flashing on the display. • Readout time varies depending on the USB device.

• Do not use too many hierarchy or folders.

• Turn off the power then on again.

• Reattach the USB device again.

• “NO FILE” appears on the display.

Selected folder is an empty folder*. Select another folder

that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains

data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.

• Tracks/folders are not played back in the

order you have intended.

The playback order is determined by the write-in time

stamp. The first track/folder written into the USB device

will be the first track/folder for playback.

• “CANNOT PLAY” flashes on the display.

• “NO USB” appears on the display.

• Attach a USB device that contains tracks encoded in an

appropriate format.

• The unit cannot detect the USB device.

• Reattach the USB device again.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,

and a limited number of symbols.

• While playing a track, sound is sometimes The MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into

interrupted.

the USB device.

Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB device, and

try again.

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance

How to clean the connectors

To keep discs clean

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the

connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with

alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with

a soft cloth in a straight line from center

to edge.

• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional

record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean

discs.

Connectors

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough spots

around the inner and outer edges. If

such a disc is used, this unit may reject

the disc.

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in

the following cases:

• After starting the heater in the car.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a

pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this

case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a

few hours until the moisture has evaporated.

Do not use the following discs:

Single CD

—8 cm (3-3/16”) disc

Warped disc

How to handle discs

When removing a disc from its

case, press down the center holder

of the case and lift the disc out,

holding it by the edges.

Center holder

Sticker and sticker residue

Stick-on label

• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its

recording surface.

When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the

disc around the center holder (with the printed surface

facing up).

C-thru Disc (semi-

transparent disc)

Unusual shape

• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.

Transparent or semi-

transparent parts on its

recording area

REFERENCES 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

Power Output:

20 W RMS × 4 Channels at 4 Ω

and ≤ 1% THD+N

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

Load Impedance:

80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ω)

4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Tone Control Range:

Bass:

12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz)

Q1.0, Q1.25, Q1.5, Q2.0

Middle:

Treble:

12 dB (0.5 kHz, 1.0 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 2.5 kHz)

Q0.75, Q1.0, Q1.25

12 dB (10.0 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15.0 kHz,

17.5 kHz)

Q = Fixed

Frequency Response:

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

1 kΩ

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

Output Impedance:

Other Terminal:

USB input jack, AUX (auxiliary) input jack,

Steering wheel remote input

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM: with channel interval set to 100 kHz 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz

or 200 kHz

with channel interval set to 50 kHz 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM: with channel interval set to 10 kHz 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz

with channel interval set to 9 kHz 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

FM Tuner

Usable Sensitivity:

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

65 dB

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):

Frequency Response:

Stereo Separation:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

35 dB

AM Tuner

Sensitivity:

20 μV

Selectivity:

35 dB

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD PLAYER SECTION

Type:

Compact disc player

Signal Detection System:

Non-contact optical pickup

(semiconductor laser)

Number of Channels:

2 channels (stereo)

5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

96 dB

Frequency Response:

Dynamic Range:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

98 dB

Wow and Flutter:

Less than measurable limit

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)

WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:

USB SECTION

USB Standard:

USB 1.1, USB 2.0

Max. 12 Mbps

Mass storage class

FAT 32/16/12

Data Transfer Rate (Full Speed):

Compatible Device:

Compatible File System:

Playable Audio Format:

Max. Current:

MP3/WMA

DC 5 V 500 mA

GENERAL

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V

(11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System:

Negative ground

Allowable Operating Temperature:

Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:

0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)

182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm

(7-3/16” × 2-1/16” × 6-5/16”)

Panel Size:

188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm

(7-7/16” × 2-5/16” × 1/4”)

Mass:

1.3 kg (2.9 lbs) (excluding accessories)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone directory for the nearest car audio speciality shop.

REFERENCES 25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Still having trouble??

USA ONLY

Call 1-800-252-5722

http://www.jvc.com

We can help you!

EN, SP, FR

1008DTSMDTJEIN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KD-R400

Installation/Connection Manual

Manual de instalación/conexión

Manuel d’installation/raccordement

1008DTSMDTJEIN

EN, SP, FR

GET0576-002A

[J]

ENGLISH

ESPAÑOL

FRANÇAIS

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground

electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a

voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio este sistema, será necesario un inversor de tensión, que puede ser

Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con 12 V de CC, con

sistemas eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA. Si su vehículo no posee

Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant

continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce

type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous

pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.

dealers.

adquirido en los concesionarios de JVC de equipos de audio para

automóviles.

WARNINGS

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the

battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before

installing the unit.

ADVERTENCIAS

AVERTISSEMENTS

Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher

negativo de la batería y que efectúe todas las conexiones eléctricas

antes de instalar la unidad.

la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les raccordements

électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after

installation.

• Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis

del automóvil después de la instalación.

• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de

cet appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.

Notes:

Notas:

Remarques:

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows

frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.

• Reemplace el fusible por uno con la corriente especificada. Si el

fusible se quemase frecuentemente consulte con su concesionario

de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.

• Se recomienda conectar altavoces que tengan una potencia máxima

de más de 50 W (tanto en las partes delantera como trasera, con una

impedancia de 4 Ω á 8 Ω). Si la potencia máxima es de menos de 50

W, cambie “AMP GAIN” para evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte

la página 16 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).

• Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los terminales de los conductores

NO UTILIZADOS con cinta aislante.

• El sumidero térmico estará muy caliente después del uso. Asegúrese

de no tocarlo al desmontar esta unidad.

• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute

souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.

• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance

maximum de plus de 50 W (à l’arrière et à l’avant et avec une

impédance de 4 Ω à 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est inférieure à

50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes

(voir page 16 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).

• Pour éviter les courts-circuits, recouvrez les extrémités des fils

INUTILISÉS avec une bande isolante.

• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire

attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.

• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power

of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an

impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,

change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being

damaged (see page 16 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads

with insulating tape.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it

when removing this unit.

Heat sink / Sumidero térmico / Dissipateur de chaleur

Parts list for installation and connection

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Con esta unidad se suministran las siguientes piezas. Si hay algún

consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately.

Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión

Liste des pièces pour l’installation et

raccordement

Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose

elemento faltante, consulte inmediatamente con su concesionario de

JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.

manquait, consultez votre revendeur autoradio JVC immédiatement.

A / B

Hard case/Control panel

Estuche duro/Panel de control

Etui de transport/Panneau de commande

Sleeve

Cubierta

Manchon

Trim plate

Placa de guarnición

Plaque d’assemblage

Power cord

Cordón de alimentación

Cordon d’alimentation

Washer (ø5)

Arandela (ø5)

Rondelle (ø5)

Lock nut (M5)

Tuerca de seguridad (M5)

Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)

Mounting bolt—M4 × 5 mm (M4 × 1/4");

M5 × 12.5 mm (M5 × 1/2")

Perno de montaje—M4 × 5 mm (M4 × 1/4 pulgada);

M5 × 12,5 mm (M5 × 1/2 pulgada)

Boulon de montage—M4 × 5 mm (M4 × 1/4 pouces);

M5 × 12,5 mm (M5 × 1/2 pouces)

Rubber cushion

Cojín de goma

Amortisseur en caoutchouc

Handles

Manijas

Poignées

Remote controller

Control remoto

Télécommande

Battery

Pila

Pile

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION

INSTALACION (MONTAJE EN EL

TABLERO DE INSTRUMENTOS)

INSTALLATION (MONTAGE

DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)

(IN-DASH MOUNTING)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Si tiene alguna

questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult

your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.

L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si

vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des kits

pregunta o necesita información acerca de las herramientas para

instalación, consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed para automóviles o a una compañía que suministra tales herramientas. compagnie d’approvisionnement.

by a qualified technician.

• Si usted no está seguro de cómo instalar correctamente la unidad,

hágala instalar por un técnico cualificado.

• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le

faire installer par un technicien qualifié.

Do the required electrical connections.

Realice las conexiones eléctricas requeridas.

Réalisez les connexions électriques.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

Doble las lengüetas apropiadas para

retener firmemente la manga en su lugar.

Tordez les languettes appropriées pour

maintenir le manchon en place.

Removing the unit

Extracción de la unidad

Retrait de l’appareil

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Antes de extraer la unidad, libere la sección trasera.

Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

Inserte las dos manijas y, a continuación,

extráigalas de la manera indicada en

la ilustración para poder desmontar la

unidad.

Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la

façon illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.

When using the optional stay / Cuando emplea un

soporte opcional / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Instalación de la unidad sin utilizar

la cubierta / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil scans utiliser de manchon

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

option

En un automóvil Toyota, por ejemplo, en primer lugar desmonte el autorradio e instale la unidad en su lugar.

Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.

Stay (option)

Soporte (opción)

Hauban (en option)

Fire wall

Tabique a prueba de incendios

Cloison

Flat head screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*²

Tornillos de cabeza plana—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*²

Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pouces)*²

Dashboard

Tablero de

instrumentos

Bracket*²

Ménsula*²

Support*²

Tableau de bord

Screw (option)

Tornillo (opción)

Vis (en option)

Flat head screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*²

Tornillos de cabeza plana—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*²

Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pouces)*²

Pocket

Compartimiento

Poche

Bracket*²

Ménsula*²

Support*²

Note

Nota

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm (3/8") -long screws. If longer

screws are used, they could damage the unit.

: Cuando instala la unidad en la ménsula de montaje, asegúrese de utilizar los tornillos de 8 mm (3/8 pulgada) de

longitud. Si se utilizan tornillos más largos, éstos pueden dañar la unidad.

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.

Instale la unidad a un ángulo de menos de 30˚.

Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de

30˚.

Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm

(3/8 pouces). Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.

When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on

Al poner la unidad vertical, tenga cuidado de no dañar el fusible

provisto en la parte posterior.

No suministrado con esta unidad.

Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne

pas endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.

Non fourni avec cet appareil.

the rear.

Not supplied for this unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENGLISH

ESPAÑOL

FRANÇAIS

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS

RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker

connections:

PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la fuente

de alimentación y de los altavoces:

PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion

des enceintes:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de

• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon

d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait

sérieusement endommagé.

• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation

aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.

car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the

speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

alimentación a la batería de automóvil, pues podrían

producirse graves daños en la unidad.

• ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del

cable de alimentación, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su

automóvil.

A ^{Typical connections / Conexiones tipicas / Raccordements typiques}

Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le

câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager

sérieusement l’appareil.

Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de

la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.

Antes de la conexión: Verifique atentamente el conexionado del

vehículo. Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños graves en la

Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car unidad.

body may be different in color.

Los cordones del cable de alimentación y los del conector

procedentes de la carrocería del automóvil podrían ser de diferentes

en color.

1 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order

1 Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentación en el

spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.

specified in the illustration below.

orden especificado en la ilustración de abajo.

2 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.

3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

2 Conecte el cable de antena.

3 Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.

Rear line out (see diagram

)

Rear ground terminal

Terminal de tierra posterior

Salida de línea trasera (véase diagrama

)

Sortie de ligne arrière (voir le diagramme

)

Borne arrière de masse

15 A fuse

Fusible de 15 A

Fusible 15 A

Antenna terminal

Terminal de la

antena

Borne de l’antenne

Steering wheel remote input (see

diagram

)

Entrada del control remoto del

volante de dirección (véase

diagrama

Entrée de la télécommande de

volant (voir le diagramme

)

Ignition switch

Interruptor de encendido

Interrupteur d’allumage

Black

Negro

Noir

)

To the metallic body or chassis of the car

A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil

Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture

Yellow*²

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery

(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del

automóvil (desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)

A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la

voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)

Amarillo*²

Jaune*²

Fuse block

Bloque de fusibles

Porte-fusible

Red

Rojo

Rouge

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles

Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible

Blue with white stripe

Azul con rayas blancas

Bleu avec bande blanche

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any (200 mA max.)

Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere (máx. 200 mA)

Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une (200 mA max.)

White with black stripe

White

Blanco

Blanc

Gray with black stripe

Gris con rayas negras

Gris avec bande noire

Gray

Gris

Green with black stripe

Verde con rayas negras

Vert avec bande noire

Green

Verde

Vert

Purple with black stripe

Púrpura con rayas negras

Violet avec bande noire

Purple

Púrpura

Violet

Blanco con rayas negras

Blanc avec bande noire

Left speaker (front)

Altavoz izquierdo (frontal)

Enceinte gauche (avant)

Right speaker (front)

Left speaker (rear)

Right speaker (rear)

Altavoz derecho (trasero)

Enceinte droit (arrière)

Altavoz derecho (frontal)

Altavoz izquierdo (trasero)

Enceinte droit (avant)

Enceinte gauche (arrière)

Not supplied for this unit.

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead

must be connected; otherwise, the power cannot be turned on.

No suministrado con esta unidad.

Non fourni avec cet appareil.

Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil

doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut pas être mis sous tension.

Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta unidad previa a de la

instalación, es necesario conectar este cable, de lo contrario no se podrá

conectar la alimentación.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Conexión al control remoto del volante de dirección / Connexion de la télécommande

de volant

If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller,

Si votre voiture est équipée d’une télécommande de volant, vous

pouvez commander cet autoradio en utilisant cette télécommande.

Pour la connexion, vous avez besoin d’un adaptateur de

télécommande spécialisé (non fourni) correspondant à votre voiture.

Pour en savoir plus, consultez le revendeur autoradio où vous avez

acheté votre autoradio.

Si su automóvil está equipado con control remoto en el volante de

dirección, podrá controlar este receptor utilizando el control remoto.

Para la conexión, se requiere un adaptador remoto exclusivo (no

suministrado) que sea adecuado para su automóvil. Para los detalles,

consulte con el concesionario car audio donde compró el receptor.

you can operate this unit using the controller. For connection, an

exclusive remote adapter (not supplied) which matches your car is

required. For details, consult the same car audio dealer as where the

unit is purchased.

Remote adapter (not supplied for this unit)

Adaptador para remoto exclusivo (no suministrado con esta unidad)

Adaptateur pour télécommande spécialisé (non fourni avec cet appareil)

Steering wheel remote input

Entrada del control remoto del volante de dirección

Entrée de la télécommande de volant

Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)

Control remoto del volante de dirección (equipado en el vehículo)

Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)

Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer / Conexión de los amplificadores o subwoofer externos / Connexion d’amplificateurs

extérieurs ou d’un caisson de grave

Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre système

autoradio.

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote

lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through

this unit.

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the

amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.

Usted podrá conectar un amplificador para mejorar el sistema estéreo

de su automóvil.

• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)

au fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il

puisse être commandé via cet appareil.

• Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les

à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet appareil

inutilisés.

• Conecte el conductor remoto (azul con rayas blancas) al conductor

remoto del otro equipo para poderlo controlar a través de esta

unidad.

• Desconecte los altavoces de esta unidad y conéctelos al

amplificador. Los cables de los altavoces de esta unidad

quedan sin usar.

Remote lead

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)

Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)

Cable remoto

Fil d’alimentation à distance

Remote lead (blue with white stripe)

Cable remoto (azul con rayas blancas)

Fil d’alimentation à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)

Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 16 of the

INSTRUCTIONS.)

Ajuste “L/O MODE” a “REAR” (Consulte la página

16 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.)

Réglez “L/O MODE” sur “REAR” (Voir page 16 du

MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any

Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere

Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il

y en a une

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Cable de señal (no suministrado con esta unidad)

Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil)

JVC Amplifier

Amplificador de JVC

JVC Amplificateur

Rear speakers

Altavoces posteriores

Enceintes arrière

Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W” (See page 16 of

the INSTRUCTIONS.)

Ajuste “L/O MODE” a “SUB.W” (Consulte la página 16 del

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.)

Front speakers

Altavoces delanteros

Enceintes avant

Réglez “L/O MODE” sur “SUB.W” (Voir page 16 du

MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)

Remote lead

Cable remoto

Fil d’alimentation

à distance

JVC Amplifier

Amplificador de JVC

JVC Amplificateur

Subwoofer

Caisson de grave

or / o / ou

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of

the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove

the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage

to the unit.

Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería metálica o al chasis—a un

lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto con pintura, quítela antes de

fijar el cable). De lo contrario, se podrían producir daños en la unidad.

Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la

voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert

de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil

peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.

TROUBLESHOOTING

LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS

EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES

• The fuse blows.

• El fusible se quema.

• Le fusible saute.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

* ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados?

* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?

• Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

• No es posible conectar la alimentación.

* ¿Está el cable amarillo conectado?

• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.

* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?

• No sound from the speakers.

• No sale sonido de los altavoces.

• Pas de son des enceintes.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado?

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?

• Sound is distorted.

• El sonido presenta distorsión.

• Le son est déformé.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?

* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una

masa común?

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?

* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble

à la masse?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using

• Perturbación de ruido.

* ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil

utilizando los cordones más corto y más grueso?

• Interférence avec les sons.

* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la

voiture avec un cordon court et épais?

shorter and thicker cords?

• This unit becomes hot.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

• Esta unidad se calienta.

• Cet appareil devient chaud.

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?

* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una

masa común?

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?

* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble

à la masse?

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

• Esta unidad no funciona en absoluto.

* ¿Reinicializó la unidad?

• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.

* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD RECEIVER

CD-RECEIVER

РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ

∆ΕΚΤΗΣ ΜΕ CD

KD-R501/KD-R402/KD-R401

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.

Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 6.

Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 6.

Για να ακυρώσετε την επίδειξη λειτουργίας στην θóνη, βλ. σελίδα 6.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.

Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.

Για πληρoφoρίες σχετικά µε την εγκατάσταση και τις συνδέσεις, ανατρέξτε στo αντίστoιχo ξεχωριστό εγχειρίδιo.

INSTRUCTIONS

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

Ο∆ΗΓΙΕΣ

GET0574-006A

[EY]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best

possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical

instruments.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to

look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic

accident.

Battery

Caution on volume setting:

Products

Digital devices (CD/USB) produce very little noise

compared with other sources. Lower the volume before

playing these digital sources to avoid damaging the

speakers by sudden increase of the output level.

Information for Users on Disposal of Old

Equipment and Batteries

[European Union only]

These symbols indicate that the product and the

battery with this symbol should not be disposed as

general household waste at its end-of-life.

If you wish to dispose of this product and the

battery, please do so in accordance with applicable

national legislation or other rules in your country

and municipality.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will

block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any complicated

operations.

By disposing of this product correctly, you will help

to conserve natural resources and will help prevent

potential negative effects on the environment and

human health.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold

weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes

normal before operating the unit.

Notice:

The sign Pb below the symbol for batteries indicates

that this battery contains lead.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Detaching the control panel

CONTENTS

Detaching the control panel.........................

Attaching the control panel .........................

How to reset your unit .................................

How to forcibly eject a disc...........................

OPERATIONS

Basic operations...........................................

Preparation..................................................

Listening to the radio...................................

Disc operations............................................. 10

Listening to the USB device.......................... 11

Attaching the control panel

How to reset your unit

EXTERNAL DEVICES

Listening to the other external

components.............................................. 12

Using the remote controller—RM-RK50 ...... 13

SETTINGS

Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 14

Menu operations.......................................... 16

Color settings (for KD-R501) ........................ 19

REFERENCES

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

More about this unit .................................... 20

Troubleshooting........................................... 23

Maintenance................................................ 25

Specifications............................................... 26

How to forcibly eject a disc

• You can forcibly eject the loaded disc even if the disc is

locked. To lock/unlock the disc, see page 10.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

This mark is used to indicate...

Turn the control dial to make a

selection, then press to confirm the

selection.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic operations

• FM/AM: Select preset station.

• CD/USB: Select folder.

• Turn on the power.

• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).

• Turn off the power [Hold].

Select the source.

FM = CD*²= USB = AUX IN*³= AM*³=

(back to the beginning)

Detach the panel.

Change the display information.

• FM/AM: Search for station.

• CD/USB: Select track.

Return to the previous menu.

Remote sensor

• You can control this unit with an optionally

purchased remote controller. For details, see

page 13.

• Enter list operations.

• Enter Menu setting [Hold].

• Control the volume*⁴or select items [Turn].

• Confirm the selection [Press].

• FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].

• CD/USB: Enter playback mode [Hold].

Pause/resume playback*⁴[Press].

Loading slot

Display window

Eject disc.

• Activate/deactivate TA Standby Reception.

• Enter PTY Searching mode [Hold].

AUX (auxiliary) input jack

USB (Universal Serial Bus) input jack

Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.

You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no

disc is in the unit.

You cannot select these sources if they were disabled

in the Menu (see “SRC SELECT” in “Menu

operations” on page 19).

You can still adjust the volume during pause when

the selected source is CD/USB.

Before resume playback, check to be sure that you

have not raise the volume level too much.

KD-R501: You can change the display and button illumination (see “COLOR” on page 17).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display window

Tr (track) indicator

Source display / Track number / Folder number /

Time countdown indicator

DISC indicator

Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,

ROCK, POPS, USER

Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),

(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)

EQ (equalizer) indicator

LOUD (loudness) indicator

Disc information indicators—

TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)

Main display

Radio Data System indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY

Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),

MO (monaural)

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Searc}O_{h A}P_nE_dR_DA_oT_wIO_nloN_aS_d.

Preparation

Canceling the display demonstration and setting the clock

• See also page 16.

Turn on the power.

Cancel the display demonstrations

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”

Set the clock

Press and hold until

the main menu is

Select “CLOCK” = “CLOCK SET.”

called up.

Adjust the hour, then press control dial once to proceed to adjust

the minute.

[Turn] = [Press]

Select “24H/12H,” then “24 HOUR” or “12 HOUR.”

•

Repeat this

procedure.

• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.

Changing the display information

When the power is turned off: The current clock time is displayed if “CLOCK DISP” is set to “CLOCK OFF,”

(see page 16).

When the power is turned on: The display information of the current source changes as follows:

FM/AM

Station Frequency = Clock = (back to the beginning)

FM Radio

Data System beginning)

Station name (PS) = Station Frequency = Programme type (PTY) = Clock = (back to the

Audio CD/CD Text: Disc title/performer*¹= Track title*¹= Current track number with the

elapsed playing time = Current track number with the clock time =

(back to the beginning)

CD/USB

MP3/WMA:

Album name/performer (folder name)*²= Track title (file name)*²=

Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current track

number with the clock time = (back to the beginning)

If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.

If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF” (see page 16),

folder name and file name appear.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Listening to the radio

Select “FM” or “AM.”

Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.

When a station is tuned in, searching stops. To stop searching, press the same

button again.

• You can also search for a station manually—Manual Search. Hold either one of

the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.

• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, the ST

indicator lights up on the display.

Improving the FM reception

Storing stations in memory

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive,

activate monaural mode for better reception.

• See also page 17.

Automatic presetting (FM)—SSM (Strong-

station Sequential Memory)

You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.

While listening to a station...

[Turn] = [Press]

Select the preset number range you want to

store.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.

• The MO indicator lights up on the display.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator

goes off.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically.

• To stop searching, press 4 /¢

To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.

Continued on the next page

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Searc}O_{h A}P_nE_dR_DA_oT_wIO_nloN_aS_d.

Manual presetting (FM/AM)

You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations

for AM.

The following features are available only for FM

Radio Data System stations.

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset

number “04.”

Searching for FM Radio Data

System programme—PTY Search

You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite

programme by searching for a PTY code.

The last selected PTY code

appears.

Select preset number “04.”

Select one of your favorite programme types

or a PTY code.

Start searching for your favorite programme.

Selecting preset station

If a station is broadcasting a programme of the

same PTY code as you have selected, that station is

tuned in.

Using the standby receptions

TA Standby Reception

[Turn] = [Press]

TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch

temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any

source other than AM.

The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the

current level is lower than the preset level (see

page 17).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To activate TA Standby Reception

The TP (Traffic Programme)

Tracing the same programme—

Network-Tracking Reception

When driving in an area where FM reception is not

sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to

another FM Radio Data System station of the same

network, possibly broadcasting the same programme

with stronger signals (see the illustration below).

indicator either lights up or flashes.

• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is

activated.

• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is

not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening

to an FM station without the Radio Data System

signals required for TA Standby Reception.)

To activate the reception, tune in to another station

providing these signals. The TP indicator will stop

flashing and remain lit.

When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking

Reception is activated.

To change the Network-Tracking Reception

setting, see “AF-REG” on page 17.

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas

(01 – 05)

To deactivate the TA Standby Reception

The TP indicator goes off.

PTY Standby Reception

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch

temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any

source other than AM.

To activate and select your favorite PTY code for

PTY Standby Reception, see page 17.

The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.

• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception

is activated.

• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is

not yet activated.

To activate the reception, tune in to another station

providing these signals. The PTY indicator will stop

flashing and remain lit.

Automatic station selection—

Programme Search

Usually when you select a preset number, the station

preset in that number is tuned in.

If the signals from the FM Radio Data System preset

station are not sufficient for good reception, this

unit, using the AF data, tunes in to another frequency

possibly broadcasting the same programme as the

original preset station is broadcasting.

• The unit takes some time to tune in to another

station using programme search.

• See also page 17.

To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select

“PTY OFF” for the PTY code (see page 17). The PTY

indicator goes off.

PTY codes

NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,

SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY

M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),

WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE

IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),

OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Searc}O_{h A}P_nE_dR_DA_oT_wIO_nloN_aS_d.

Disc operations

Turn on the power.

Insert a disc.

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change

the source or eject the disc.

Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you

to...

Stop playing and ejecting the disc

[Press]Pause/resume playback.

• “NO DISC” appears. Press SRC to listen to another

playback source.

MP3/WMA: Select folder

Prohibiting disc ejection

[Press]Select track

[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

Selecting a track/folder

[Turn] = [Press]

• For MP3/WMA discs, select the desired folder,

then the desired track by repeating the control dial

procedures.

• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting the playback modes

REPEAT

You can use only one of the following playback modes

at a time.

TRACK RPT

FOLDER RPT

Repeats current track

MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder

RANDOM

FOLDER RND

MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all

tracks of current folder, then

tracks of next folders

ALL RND

Randomly plays all tracks

[Turn] = [Press]

• To cancel repeat play or random play, select

“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”

REPEAT Ô RANDOM

• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.

[Turn] = [Press]

Listening to the USB device

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB device.

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or detach the USB device.

USB input jack

USB memory

If a USB device has been attached...

To stop play and detach the USB device

Straightly pull it out from the unit.

• Press SRC to listen to another playback source.

Playback starts from where it has been stopped

previously.

• If a different USB device is currently attached,

playback starts from the beginning.

You can operate the USB device in the same way you

operate the files on a disc. (See pages 10 and 11.)

Continued on the next page

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search}O_AnP_dE_DR_oA_wT_nI_loO_aN_d.S 11

• You cannot connect a computer to the USB input

terminal of the unit.

• Make sure all important data has been backed up to

avoid losing the data.

• Do not leave a USB device in the car, expose to direct

sunlight, or high temperature to avoid deformation

or cause damages to the device.

• Some USB devices may not work immediately after

you turn on the power.

Cautions:

• Avoid using the USB device if it might hinder your

safety driving.

• Do not pull out and attach the USB device repeatedly

while “READING” is shown on the display.

• Do not start the car engine if a USB device is

connected.

• This unit may not be able to play the files depending

on the type of USB device.

• Operation and power supply may not work as

intended for some USB devices.

• For more details about USB operations, see page 22.

Listening to the other external components

You can connect an external component to AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.

Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting, see page 19.

Select “AUX IN.”

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

Adjust the volume.

—

Adjust the sound as you want (see pages 14 and 15).

—

Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack

Portable audio player, etc.

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

(not supplied)

12 OPERATIONS & EXTERNAL DEVICES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the remote controller —

RM-RK50

This unit can be remotely controlled as instructed here

(with an optionally purchased remote controller). We

recommend that you use remote controller RM-RK50

with your unit.

Installing the lithium coin battery (CR2025)

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is on.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

• Changes the preset stations.

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.

Adjusts the volume level.

Caution:

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire, or the like.

Selects the sound mode.

Selects the source.

If the effectiveness of the remote controller

decreases, replace the battery.

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and

held.

Before using the remote controller:

• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote

sensor on the unit.

• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light

(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

Warning (to prevent accidents and damage):

• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its

equivalent.

• Do not leave the remote controller in a place (such

as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight for a long

time.

• Store the battery in a place where children cannot

reach.

• Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery,

or dispose of it in a fire.

Remote sensor

• Do not leave the battery with other metallic

materials.

• Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar

tools.

• Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when

throwing away or saving it.

EXTERNAL DEVICES 13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting a preset sound mode

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.

• See also page 16.

[Turn] = [Press]

• See page 15 for “USER” settings.

Preset value setting for each sound mode

Preset value

Sound

mode

BASS

MIDDLE

TREBLE

LOUD

(loudness)

Freq. Level

USER

60 Hz

100 Hz

80 Hz

00 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

+03 Q1.0 1.0 kHz

+01 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

+02 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

+04 Q1.0 1.0 kHz

+03 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

00 Q1.0 10.0 kHz

00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz

+01 Q1.25 10.0 kHz

–02 Q1.0 10.0 kHz

00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz

+02

+03

+02

+01

+03

—

ROCK

CLASSIC

POPS

OFF

100 Hz

60 Hz

HIP HOP

JAZZ

80 Hz

Freq.: Frequency Q: Q-slope

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Storing your own sound mode

You can store your own adjustments in memory.

Adjust the sound elements of the selected

tone.

Select “USER” for “EQ.”

[Turn] = [Press]

Adjust the frequency.

Adjust the level.

Adjust the Q-slope.

[Turn] = [Press]

Range/selectable items

BASS MIDDLE TREBLE

Sound

elements

Frequency

60 Hz

80 Hz

0.5 kHz 10.0 kHz

1.0 kHz 12.5 kHz

100 Hz 1.5 kHz 15.0 kHz

200 Hz 2.5 kHz 17.5 kHz

While “USER” is shown on the display...

Level

–06 to –06 to –06 to

+06

Q1.0

Q1.25

Q1.5

Q2.0

Q0.75

Q1.0

Q1.25

Fixed

Select a tone.

[Turn] = [Press]

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other sound

characteristics.

The adjustment made will be stored automatically.

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And}S_DE_oT_wT_nI_lN_oaG_d.S 15

Menu operations

Call up the menu.

Select the desired item.

[Turn] = [Press]

Repeat step 2 if necessary.

• To return to the previous menu,

press BACK.

• To exit from the menu, press

DISP or MENU.

Initial: Underlined

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DEMO

Display

demonstration

CLOCK DISP*¹

• DEMO ON

Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].

Cancels.

• DEMO OFF

• CLOCK ON

Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the

power is turned off.

Clock display

• CLOCK OFF

Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about

5 seconds when the power is turned off, [6].

CLOCK SET

Clock setting

Adjust the hour, then the minute, [6].

(Initial: 0:00)

• 24 HOUR

24H/12H

See also page 6 for setting.

Time display mode • 12 HOUR

CLOCK ADJ *²

Clock adjustment

• AUTO

The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT

(clock time) data in the Radio Data System signal.

Cancels.

• OFF

Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.

Equalizer

USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ

DIMMER

Dimmer

• DIMMER ON

• DIMMER OFF

Dims the display and button illumination.

Cancels.

SCROLL*³

Scroll

• SCROLL ONCE

• SCROLL AUTO

• SCROLL OFF

Scrolls the displayed information once.

Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).

Cancels.

Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the

setting.

TAG DISPLAY

Tag display

• TAG ON

• TAG OFF

Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA

tracks.

Cancels.

If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select

“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.

Takes effect only when CT data is received.

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

AF-REG *⁴

Alternative

frequency/

regionalization

reception

• AF ON

When the currently received signals become weak, the unit

switches to another station (the programme may differ

from the one currently received), [9].

• The AF indicator lights up.

When the currently received signals become weak, the

unit switches to another station broadcasting the same

programme.

• AF-REG ON

• OFF

• The AF and REG indicators light up.

Cancels.

PTY-STANDBY *⁴PTY OFF, PTY

PTY standby

Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY

codes, [9].

codes

TA VOLUME *⁴

Traffic

announcement

volume

VOLUME 00

(Initial: VOLUME 15)

– VOLUME 50

(or VOLUME 00

– VOLUME 30)*⁵

P-SEARCH *⁴

Programme search • SEARCH OFF

• SEARCH ON

Activates Programme Search, [9].

Cancels.

MONO*⁶

Monaural mode

• MONO ON

Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but

stereo effect will be lost, [7].

• MONO OFF

• AUTO

Restore the stereo effect.

IF BAND

Intermediate

frequency band

Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises

between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)

Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but

sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect

will remain.

• WIDE

COLOR 01

– COLOR 29,

USER

Select one of the preset or user color for display and button (except T/P/

/0) illumination.

(For customize color settings, “USER,” see page 19.)

MENU COLOR

Menu color

• OFF

• ON

Cancels.

Changes the display and button (except T/P/

/0)

illumination during menu, list search and playback mode

operations.

Only for FM Radio Data System stations.

Depends on the amplifier gain control.

Displayed only when the source is “FM.”

Continued on the next page

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And}S_DE_oT_wT_nI_lN_oaG_d.S 17

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

FADER*^7,*⁸

Fader

R06 – F06

Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.

(Initial: 00)

BALANCE*⁸

Balance

L06 – R06

Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.

(Initial: 00)

LOUD

Loudness

• LOUD OFF

• LOUD ON

Cancels.

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced

sound at a low volume level.

VOL ADJUST

Volume adjust

VOL ADJ –05

—

VOL ADJ +05

(Initial: VOL

ADJ 00)

Preset the volume adjustment level of each source (except

FM), compared to the FM volume level. The volume level

will automatically increase or decrease when you change the

source.

• Before making an adjustment, select the source you want to

adjust.

• “VOL ADJ FIX” appears on the display if “FM” is selected as

the source.

L/O MODE

Line output

mode

• SUB.W

• REAR

Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting

a subwoofer (through an external amplifier).

Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting

the speakers (through an external amplifier).

SUB.W FREQ*⁹• LOW

Frequencies lower than 72 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

Frequencies lower than 111 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

Frequencies lower than 157 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

Subwoofer

• MID

cutoff frequency • HIGH

SUB.W LEVEL*⁹SUB.W 00

Subwoofer level — SUB.W 08

Adjust the subwoofer output level.

(Initial: SUB.W 04)

BEEP

• BEEP OFF

Deactivates the key touch tone.

Activates the key touch tone.

Key touch tone • BEEP ON

TEL MUTING

Telephone

muting

• MUTING 1/

MUTING 2

• MUTING OFF

Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a

cellular phone.

Cancels.

AMP GAIN*¹⁰• LOW POWER

Amplifier gain

control

VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power

of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the

speaker.)

• HIGH POWER

VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50

If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”

This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.

Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”

The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level

set higher than “VOLUME 30.”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

AM*¹¹

AM station

• AM OFF

• AM ON

Disable “AM” in source selection.

Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].

AUX IN*¹²

Auxiliary input • AUX ON

• AUX OFF

Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.

Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].

¹¹Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.

¹²Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.

Color settings (for KD-R501)

Creating your own color

—USER Color

You can create your own colors—“DAY COLOR” or

“NIGHT COLOR.”

DAY COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to

“DIMMER OFF.”

NIGHT COLOR: Used when “DIMMER” is set to

“DIMMER ON.”

Select a primary color.

[Turn] = [Press]

Adjust the level (00 to 31) of the selected

primary color.

[Turn] = [Press]

Select “COLOR” = “USER.”

[Turn] = [Press]

If “00” is selected for all the primary colors, nothing

appear on the display.

Repeat steps 5 and 6 to adjust other primary

colors.

While “USER” is shown on the display...

Exit from the setting.

• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds, the

operation will be canceled.

[Turn] = [Press]

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And}S_DE_oT_wT_nI_lN_oaG_d.S 19

More about this unit

FM Radio Data System operations

Basic operations

• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types

of Radio Data System signals—PI (Programme

Identification) and AF (Alternative Frequency)

to work correctly. Without receiving these data

correctly, Network-Tracking Reception will not

operate correctly.

• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby

Reception, the volume level automatically changes to

the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower

than the preset level.

Turning on the power

• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn

on the power. If the source is ready, playback also

starts.

Turning off the power

• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,

playback will start from where it had been stopped

previously next time you turn on the power.

• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated

(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is

also activated automatically.

General

• If you change the source while listening to a disc,

playback stops.

Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,

playback will start from where it had been stopped

previously.

• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after

pressing MENU button, the operation will be

canceled.

Disc operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply

with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.

Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on

this product may not be recommended.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

General

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs

(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA

formats.

• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and

“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to

eject the disc.

• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are

used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or

WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.

• During SSM search...

– All previously stored stations are erased and the

stations are stored anew.

– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest

preset number will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the previously

preset station is erased when a new station is stored

in the same preset number.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the

conditions below:

– Bit rate of MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of MP3:

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (for MPEG-1)

16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Bit rate of WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of WMA: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,

Joliet, Windows extension.

• The maximum number of characters for file/folder

names vary depending on the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo: up to 64 characters

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can only play back files of the same type as

those detected first if a disc includes both audio CD

(CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,

unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this

unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the

following reasons:

– Discs are dirty or scratched.

– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens

inside the unit.

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the

“Packet Write” method.

– There are improper recording conditions (missing

data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,

warped, etc.).

– Joliet: up to 32 characters

– Windows extension: up to 64 characters

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,

255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable

bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the

elapsed time display, and do not show the actual

elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes

noticeable after performing the search function.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and

voice format.

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the

reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular

CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck

to the surface.

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an

ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperature or high

humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the

unit.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of

the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums, artists

(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

– WMA files which are not based upon Windows

Media® Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is not

constant.

• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No

other characters can be correctly displayed.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating

is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB device

• While playing from a USB device, the playback order

may differ from other players.

• USB devices equipped with special functions such as

data security functions cannot be used with the unit.

• Do not use a USB device with 2 or more partitions.

• This unit may not recognized a USB device connected

through a USB card reader.

• This unit may not play back files in a USB device

properly when using a USB extension cord.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

• This unit may be unable to play back some USB

devices or some files due to their characteristics or

recording conditions.

• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and

connection ports, some USB devices may not be

attached properly or the connection might be loose.

• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the unit

at a time. Do not use a USB hub.

• If the connected USB device does not have the correct

files, “CANNOT PLAY” appears.

• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the

conditions below:

– Bit rate of MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of MP3:

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (for MPEG-1)

16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Bit rate of WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of WMA: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and

voice format.

– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.

Ejecting a disc or removing a USB device

• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,

it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again

to protect it from dust.

• After ejecting a disc or removing a USB device,

“NO DISC” or “NO USB“ appears and you cannot

operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,

reattach a USB device, or press SRC to select another

playback source.

• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR

(variable bit rate).

• The maximum number of characters for:

– Folder names : 32 characters

– File names : 32 characters

Menu operations

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from

“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while

the volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,”

the unit automatically changes the volume level to

“VOLUME 30.”

– MP3 Tag : 64 characters

– WMA Tag : 32 characters

• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files, 255

folders (255 files per folder including folder without

unsupported files), and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit does not support SD card reader.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

• The unit does not work at all.

• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.

Reset the unit (see page 3).

Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see

page 19).

• KD-R501: Nothing appear on the display.

KD-R501: Check the USER Color settings (see page 19)

• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

• “AM” cannot be selected.

Connect the aerial firmly.

Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see

page 19).

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be

skipped.

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which

you used for recording.

• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Check the cords and connections.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.

• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately

on the display.

Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format

compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or

Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the

file names.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or

WMA tracks.)

• A longer readout time is required

Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.

(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).

• Tracks do not play back in the order you

have intended them to play.

The playback order is determined when the files are

recorded.

• The elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by

how the tracks are recorded on the disc.

• “NO FILE” appears on the display.

Selected folder is an empty folder*. Select another folder

that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains

data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.

• The correct characters are not displayed

(e.g. album name).

This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,

and a limited number of symbols.

• Noise is generated.

The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to

another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or

<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

• “READING” keeps flashing on the display. • Readout time varies depending on the USB device.

• Do not use too many hierarchy or folders.

• Turn off the power then on again.

• Reattach the USB device again.

• “NO FILE” appears on the display.

Selected folder is an empty folder*. Select another folder

that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains

data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.

• Tracks/folders are not played back in the

order you have intended.

The playback order is determined by the write-in time

stamp. The first track/folder written into the USB device

will be the first track/folder for playback.

• “CANNOT PLAY” flashes on the display.

• “NO USB” appears on the display.

• Attach a USB device that contains tracks encoded in an

appropriate format.

• The unit cannot detect the USB device.

• Reattach the USB device again.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.

• While playing a track, sound is sometimes The MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into

interrupted.

the USB device.

Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB device, and

try again.

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance

How to clean the connectors

To keep discs clean

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the

connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with

alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with

a soft cloth in a straight line from center

to edge.

• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional

record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean

discs.

Connectors

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough spots

around the inner and outer edges. If

such a disc is used, this unit may reject

the disc.

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in

the following cases:

• After starting the heater in the car.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a

pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this

case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a

few hours until the moisture has evaporated.

Do not use the following discs:

Single CD (8 cm disc)

Warped disc

How to handle discs

When removing a disc from its

case, press down the center holder

of the case and lift the disc out,

holding it by the edges.

Center holder

Sticker and sticker residue

Stick-on label

• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its

recording surface.

When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the

disc around the center holder (with the printed surface

facing up).

C-thru Disc (semi-

transparent disc)

Unusual shape

• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.

Transparent or semi-

transparent parts on its

recording area

REFERENCES 25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

Maximum Power Output:

Front/Rear:

50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

at no more than 0.8% total harmonic

distortion.

Load Impedance:

4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Tone Control Range:

Bass:

12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz)

Q1.0, Q1.25, Q1.5, Q2.0

Middle:

Treble:

12 dB (0.5 kHz, 1.0 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 2.5 kHz)

Q0.75, Q1.0, Q1.25

12 dB (10.0 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15.0 kHz,

17.5 kHz)

Q = Fixed

Frequency Response:

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

Output Impedance:

70 dB

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

1 kΩ

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

Other Terminal:

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

USB input jack, AUX (auxiliary) input jack

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM:

AM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz

LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz

FM Tuner

Usable Sensitivity:

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):

Frequency Response:

Stereo Separation:

Sensitivity:

65 dB

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

30 dB

MW Tuner

LW Tuner

20 μV

Selectivity:

35 dB

Sensitivity:

50 μV

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD PLAYER SECTION

Type:

Compact disc player

Signal Detection System:

Non-contact optical pickup

(semiconductor laser)

Number of Channels:

2 channels (stereo)

5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

96 dB

Frequency Response:

Dynamic Range:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

98 dB

Wow and Flutter:

Less than measurable limit

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)

WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:

USB SECTION

USB Standard:

USB 1.1, USB 2.0

Max. 12 Mbps

Mass storage class

FAT 32/16/12

Data Transfer Rate (Full Speed):

Compatible Device:

Compatible File System:

Playable Audio Format:

Max. Current:

MP3/WMA

DC 5 V 500 mA

GENERAL

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Negative ground

Grounding System:

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:

182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm

188 mm × 58 mm × 12 mm

1.3 kg (excluding accessories)

Panel Size:

Mass:

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

REFERENCES 27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?

Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück

Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts

Затруднения при эксплуатации?

Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство

Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства обратитесь на

соответствующую страницу

Αντιµετωπίζετε ΠΡΟΒΛΗΜΑΤΑ λειτουργίας;

Εκτελέστε επαναφορά της µονάδας

Ανατρέξτε στην ενότητα “Επαναφορά της µονάδας”

Dear Customer,

Уважаемый клиент.

This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European

directives and standards regarding electromagnetic

compatibility and electrical safety.

Данное устройство соответствует действительным

Европейским директивам и стандартам по электромагнитной

совместимости и электрической безопасности.

European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited

is:

Представительство компании Victor Company of Japan,

Limited в Европе:

JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH

Postfach 10 05 04

61145 Friedberg

JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH

Postfach 10 05 04

61145 Friedberg

Germany

Германия

Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte Kundin,

Αγαπητέ πελάτη,

dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen europäischen Richtlinien

und Normen bezüglich elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit

und elektrischer Sicherheit überein.

η συσκευή αυτή συμμορφώνεται με τις ισχύουσες Ευρωπαϊκές

Οδηγίες και πρότυπα σχετικά με την ηλεκτρομαγνητική

συμβατότητα και την ασφάλεια από ηλεκτρισμό.

Die europäische Vertretung für die Victor Company of Japan,

Limited ist:

Ο Ευρωπαϊκός αντιπρόσωπος της Victor Company of Japan,

Limited είναι:

JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH

Postfach 10 05 04

61145 Friedberg

JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH

Postfach 10 05 04

61145 Friedberg

Deutschland

Γερμανία

EN, GE, RU, GR

1008DTSMDTJEIN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KD-R501/KD-R402/KD-R401

Installation/Connection Manual

Einbau/Anschlußanleitung

Руководство по установке/подключению

Εγꢀειρίδιo εγκατάστασης/συνδέσεων

1008DTSMDTJEIN

EN, GE, RU, GR

GET0574-013A

[EY]

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

РУССКИЙ

ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC,

NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your

Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen

Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации Η συσκευή αυτή είναι σχεδιασµένη να λειτoυργεί

на 12 В постоянного напряжения с минусом σε ηλεκτρικά συστήµατα oχηµάτων στα 12 V

Anlagen mit 12 V Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung

vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht über diese

на массе. Если Ваш автомобиль не имеет этой

системы, требуется инвертор напряжения,

который может быть приобретен у дилера

автомобилнего специалиста JVC.

DC, µε ΑΡΝΗΤΙΚΗ γείωση. Εάν τo όχηµά σας

δεν ανήκει στην κατηγoρία αυτή, θα χρειαστείτε

ένα µετατρoπέα τάσης, τoν oπoίo µπoρείτε

να πρoµηθευτείτε από τoυς αντιπρoσώπoυς

συστηµάτων ψυχαγωγίας oχηµάτων της JVC.

is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-

CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealers.

Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der

bei JVC Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.

WARNINGS

WARNUNGEN

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ

ΠΡΟΦΥΛΑΞΕΙΣ

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you

Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir,

Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы

рекомендуем Вам отсоединить отрицательный

разъем аккумулятора и осуществить все

Για την απoτρoπή τυχόν βραχυκυκλωµάτων,

συνιστoύµε να απoσυνδέετε τoν αρνητικό πόλo

της µπαταρίας και να κάνετε όλες τις ηλεκτρικές

συνδέσεις πριν από την εγκατάσταση της συσκευής.

• Βεβαιωθείτε ότι θα γειώσετε τη συσκευή

αυτή στo αµάξωµα τoυ oχήµατoς ξανά µετά

την εγκατάσταση.

disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make daß Sie den negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen

all electrical connections before installing the unit.

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s

chassis again after installation.

und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse herstellen, bevor das

Gerät eingebaut wird.

• Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem Einbau

a Chassis des Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.

подключения перед установкой устройства.

• После установки обязательно заземлите

данное устройство на шасси автомобиля.

Notes:

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating.

Hinweise:

Примечания:

If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN- • Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden

• Заменяйте предохранитель другим

предохранителем указанного класса.

Если предохранитель сгорает слишком

часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего

специалиста JVC.

Σηµειώσεις:

CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

Nennleistung ersetzen. Brennt die Sicherung

häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC

Autoradiohändler.

• Εάν καεί η ασφάλεια, αντικαταστήστε την

µε καινoύργια των ίδιων oνoµαστικών

χαρακτηριστικών. Εάν η ασφάλεια καίγεται συχνά,

συµβoυλευθείτε τoν αντιπρόσωπo συστηµάτων

ψυχαγωγίας oχηµάτων της JVC.

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers

with maximum power of more than 50 W (both

at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of • Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit

4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than

50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the

speakers from being damaged (see page 18 of the

INSTRUCTIONS).

einer Maximalleistung von mehr als 50 W

anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne,

mit einer Impedanz von 4 Ω bis 8 Ω). Wenn die

Maximalleistung weniger als 50 W beträgt, stellen

Sie „AMP GAIN“ anders ein, um Schäden an den

Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite 18 der

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).

• Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die

Anschlußklemmen der NICHT VERWENDETEN

Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband umwickeln.

• Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr

heiß. Beim Ausbau des Geräts darauf achten, das

Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.

• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с

максимальной мощностью более 50 Вт (к

задней и передней панели устройства, с

полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω).

Если максимальная мощность динамиков

менее 50 Вт, перейдите в режим “AMP GAIN”,

чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.

ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 18).

• Для предотвращения короткого замыкания

заклейте НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы

изолирующей лентой.

• Συνιστάται να συνδέετε ηχεία µέγιστης ισχύoς

πάνω από 50 W (τόσo πίσω όσo και µπρoστά,

µε σύνθετη αντίσταση 4 Ω έως 8 Ω). Εάν η

µέγιστη ισχύς των ηχείων είναι µικρότερη από

50 W, αλλάξτε τη ρύθµιση “AMP GAIN” (Απoλαβή

ενισχυτή) για να απoτρέψετε ενδεχόµενη

καταστρoφή τoυς (βλ. σελίδα 18 στις O∆ΗΓΙΕΣ).

• Για να απoτρέψετε τυχόν βραχυκυκλώµατα,

καλύπτετε τoυς ακρoδέκτες των καλωδίων ΠOΥ ∆Ε

XΡΗΣΙΜOΠOΙΕΙΤΕ µε µoνωτική ταινία.

• Η ψύκτρα ζεσταίνεται πoλύ κατά τη χρήση.

Πρoσέχετε να µην την αγγίξετε καθώς αφαιρείτε τη

συσκευή.

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of

the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be

careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

• Радиатор во время использования сильно

нагревается. Старайтесь его не трогать во

время удаления устройства.

Heat sink / Abstrahlblech

Радиатор / Ψύκτρα

PRECAUTIONS on power supply

and speaker connections:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the

power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the

unit will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the

power cord to the speakers, check the speaker

wiring in your car.

VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по

ΠΡOΦΥΛΑΞΕΙΣ κατά τις συνδέσεις

τρoφoδoσίας ρεύµατoς και

ηχείων:

• ΜΗ συνδέετε τα καλώδια ηχείων της

συσκευής µε την µπαταρία τoυ oχήµατoς,

διότι ενδέχεται να πρoκληθεί σoβαρή ζηµιά

στη συσκευή.

Anschließen der Stromversorgung питанию и подключению

und Lautsprecher:

громкоговорителей:

• НЕ подключайте провода

• Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels

NICHT an der Autobatterie anschließen, da

sonst das Gerät schwer beschädigt wird.

• VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen

des Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die

громкоговорителей к аккумулятору

автомобиля, иначе устройство будет

повреждено.

• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов

громкоговорителей к кабелю питания

громкоговорителя проверьте схему соединений

громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.

• ΠΡOΤOΥ συνδέσετε τα καλώδια ηχείων της

συσκευής µε τα ηχεία, ελέγξτε την καλωδίωση των

ηχείων τoυ oχήµατoς.

Lautsprecher, die Lautsprecherverdrahtung in Ihrem

Auto überprüfen.

Parts list for installation and

connection

The following parts are provided for this unit. If

any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR

ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.

Teileliste für den Einbau und

Anschluß

Список деталей для установки и Κατάλoγoς εξαρτηµάτων για την

подключения

εγκατάσταση και τις συνδέσεις

Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem

Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте

Η συσκευή αυτή συνoδεύεται από τα εξαρτήµατα

πoυ αναφέρoνται κατωτέρω. Αν λείπει κάποιο

στοιχείο, συμβουλευτείτε αμέσως τον αντιπρόσωπο

συστημάτων ψυχαγωγίας οχημάτων της JVC.

Gerät geliefert. Falls ein Artikel fehlt, wenden Sie sich с устройством. При отсутствии какого-либо

sofort an Ihren JVC-Autoradiohändler.

элемента немедленно свяжитесь с дилером

автомобильного специалиста JVC.

Control panel

Schalttafel

Панель управления

Sleeve

Trim plate

Frontrahmen

Декоративную панель

∆ιακoσµητικό πλαίσιo

Halterung

Муфта

Βάση

Πρόσoψη

Power cord

Stromkable

Кабель питания

∆έσµη καλωδίων ρεύµατoς

Washer (ø5)

Unterlegscheibe (ø5)

Шайба (њ5)

Ρoδέλα (ø5)

Lock nut (M5)

Sicherungsmutter (M5)

Фиксирующая гайка (M5)

Ασφαλιστικό παξιµάδι (M5)

Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)

Befestigungsschraube (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12,5 mm)

Крепежный болт (M4 × 5 мм; M5 × 12,5 мм)

Βίδα στερέωσης (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12,5 mm)

Rubber cushion

Gummipuffer

Резиновый чехол

Ελαστικό παρέµβυσµα

Handles

Griffe

Рычаги

Κλειδιά

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH

MOUNTING)

EINBAU

УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В ΕΓΚΑΤΑΣΤΑΣΗ

(IM ARMATURENBRETT)

ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)

(ΤOΠOΘΕΤΗΣΗ ΣΤO ΤΑΜΠΛΩ)

The following illustration shows a typical

installation. If you have any questions or require

information regarding installation kits, consult

your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a

company supplying kits.

Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen

Einbau. Bei irgendwelchen Fragen oder wenn Sie

Informationen hinsichtlich des Einbausatzes brauchen, касающиеся установки, обратитесь к Вашему

wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC Autoradiohändler oder

ein Unternehmen das diese Einbausätze vertreibt.

• Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des Geräts

nicht sicher, lassen Sie es von einem qualifizierten

Techniker einbauen.

На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая Η εικόνα πoυ ακoλoυθεί απεικoνίζει µια τυπική

установка. Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, εγκατάσταση. Για oπoιαδήπoτε απoρία σας ή

για περισσότερες πληρoφoρίες σχετικά µε κιτ

εγκατάστασης, απευθυνθείτε στoν αντιπρόσωπo

συστηµάτων ψυχαγωγίας oχηµάτων της JVC ή σε

εταιρείες πoυ παρέχoυν τέτoια κιτ.

• Εάν έχετε αµφιβoλίες σχετικά µε τη σωστή

εγκατάσταση της συσκευής αυτής, αναθέστε την

εγκατάστασή της σε κατάλληλα εκπαιδευµένo τεχνικό.

дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC или в

компанию, поставляющую соответствующие

принадлежности.

• Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует

устанавливать это устройство, обратитесь к

квалифицированному специалисту.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit

correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

Do the required electrical connections.

Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen Anschlüsse vor.

Выполните необходимые подключения контактов,

как показано на оборотной стороне этой

инструкции.

Κάντε τις αναγκαίες ηλεκτρικές συνδέσεις.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve

firmly in place.

Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die

Manschette sicher festzuhalten.

Отогните соответствующие фиксаторы,

предназначенные для прочной

установки корпуса.

Λυγίστε τις κατάλληλες γλωττίδες για να

συγκρατηθεί η βάση σταθερά στη θέση της.

Removing the unit

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Ausbau des Geräts

Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil

freigeben.

Удаление устройства

Перед удалением устройства освободите

заднюю часть.

Αφαίρεση της συσκευής

Πρoτoύ αφαιρέσετε τη συσκευή, απασφαλίστε τo

πίσω µέρoς.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated

so that the unit can be removed.

Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann ziehen

wie in der Abbildung gezeigt, so daß das Gerät

entfernt werden kann.

Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их, как

показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть устройство.

Εισαγάγετε τις δύo λαβές και κατόπιν τραβήξτε τις,

όπως φαίνεται στην εικόνα, µε τρόπo ώστε να είναι

δυνατή η αφαίρεση της συσκευής.

When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden der

Anker-Option / При использовании дополнительной

стойки / Όταν χρησιµoπoιείτε τo πρoαιρετικό στήριγµα

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne

Halterung / При установке устройства без использования муфты / Όταν

τoπoθετείτε τη συσκευή χωρίς χρήση της βάσης

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

Stay (option)

Anker (Option)

Zum Beispiel in einem Toyota zuerst das Autoradio ausbauen und dann das Gerät an seinem Platz einbauen.

В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите устройство на место.

Στα oχήµατα της Toyota, για παράδειγµα, πρώτα πρέπει να αφαιρέσετε τo ραδιόφωνo και κατόπιν να τoπoθετήσετε τη συσκευή στη

Стойка (дополнительно)

Γωνιακό στήριγµα (πρoαιρετικό)

Fire wall

Feuerwand

Стена

θέση τoυ.

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*²

Πλακέ βίδες (M5 × 8 mm)*²

∆ιαχωριστικό τoίχωµα

µηχανής

Dashboard

Armaturenbrett

Приборная панель

Ταµπλώ

Bracket*²/ Konsole*²

Кронштейн*²

Γλωττίδα στερέωσης*²

Screw (option)

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*²

Πλακέ βίδες (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Schraube (Option)

Винт (дополнительно)

Βίδα (πρoαιρετική)

Pocket / Taschen /

Карман / Εσoχή

Bracket*²/ Konsole*²

Кронштейн*²/ Γλωττίδα στερέωσης*²

Note

When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer

screws are used, they could damage the unit.

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.

Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel von

weniger als 30˚ auf.

Hinweis

Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet werden.

Werden längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.

Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм.

При использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.

Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.

Τoπoθετήστε τη µoνάδα υπό γωνία µικρότερη

των 30°.

Σηµείωση

Όταν τoπoθετείτε τη συσκευή στo στήριγµα στερέωσης, βεβαιωθείτε ότι θα χρησιµoπoιήσετε τις βίδες

µήκoυς 8 mm. Εάν χρησιµoπoιήσετε µακρύτερες βίδες, ενδέχεται να πρoκαλέσετε ζηµιά στη συσκευή.

When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage

the fuse on the rear.

Not supplied for this unit.

Beim Aufstellen des Geräts darauf achten, daß die

Sicherung auf der Rückseite nicht beschädigt wird.

Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.

Устанавливайте устройство таким образом,

чтобы не повредить предохранитель,

расположенный сзади.

Όταν τoπoθετείτε τη συσκευή σε όρθια θέση,

πρoσέχετε να µην πρoκαλέσετε ζηµιά στην ασφάλεια

πoυ βρίσκεται στo πίσω µέρoς της συσκευής.

∆ε συµπεριλαµβάνoνται στη συσκευασία της

συσκευής αυτής.

Hе входит в комплект поставки.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

РУССКИЙ

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΙΚΕΣ ΣΥΝ∆ΕΣΕΙΣ

If your car is equipped with the ISO

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobiles / Bei bestimmten VW-/Audi- oder Opel-

(Vauxhall-) Fahrzeugen / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall) / Για

ορισμένα αυτοκίνητα VW/Audi ή Opel (Vauxhall)

connector / Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit dem

ISO-Steckverbinder ausgestattet ist / Если

автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO / Εάν

τо óχηµά σας διαθέτει σύνδεσµо ISO

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.

• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.

Es kann erforderlich sein, die Verdrahtung des mitgelieferten Stromkabels zu modifizieren, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.

• Wenden Sie sich vor dem Einbau dieses Receivers an Ihre Auto-Fachwerkstatt.

Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.

• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.

Ενδέχεται να χρειαστεί να τρоπоπоιήσετε την καλωδίωση της παρεχóµενης δέσµης καλωδίων ρεύµατоς, σύµφωνα µε την εικóνα.

• Πρоτоύ εγκαταστήσετε τη συσκευή αυτή, απευθυνθείτε στоν εξоυσιоδоτηµένо αντιπρóσωπо τоυ оχήµατóς σας.

• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.

• Schließen Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.

• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.

• Συνδέστε τоυς συνδέσµоυς ISO σύµφωνα µε την εικóνα.

From the car body

Original wiring / Original verdrahtung /

Исходная схема соединений / Αρχική καλωδίωση

Modified wiring 1 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 1 /

Преобразованная схема соединений 1 / Τρоπоπоιηµένη καλωδίωση 1

Von der

Fahrzeugkarosserie

От корпуса автомобиля

Απó τо αµάξωµα τоυ

оχήµατоς

ISO connector

ISO-Steckverbinder

Разъем ISO

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on. / Verwenden Sie die modifizierte

Verdrahtung 2 wenn der Receiver nicht einschaltet. / Если приемник не включается,

используйте преобразованную схему соединений 2. / Εάν η συσκευή δεν

τίθεται σε λειτоυργία, χρησιµоπоιήστε την τρоπоπоιηµένη καλωδίωση 2.

ISO connector of the supplied power cord

ISO-Stecker des mitgelieferten Stromkabels

Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в

комплект поставки

Σύνδεσµоς ISO

Modified wiring 2 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 / Преобразованная схема

соединений 2 / Τρоπоπоιηµένη καλωδίωση 2

Σύνδεσµоς ISO της δέσµης καλωδίων της συσκευής

Y: Yellow

Gelb

Желтый

Κίτρινо

R: Red

View from the lead side

Rot

Von der Kabelseite aus gesehen

Вид со стороны выводов

Όψη απó την πλευρά των καλωδίων

Красный

Κóκκινо

Connections without using the ISO connector / Anschlüsse ohne Verwendung des ISO-Steckverbinders / Подключение без использования

разъема ISO / Συνδέσεις χωρίς τη χρήση των συνδέσμων ISO

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle

Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug

sorgfältig überprüfen. Falsche Anschlüsse können

ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät hervorrufen.

Перед началом подключений: Тщательно

проверьте проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное

подключение может привести к серьезному

повреждению устройства.

Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от

кузова автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.

Πριν απó τη σύνδεση: Ελέγξτε πρоσεκτικά την

καλωδίωση τоυ оχήµατоς. Η τυχóν εσφαλµένη σύνδεση

είναι δυνατó να πρоκαλέσει σоβαρή ζηµιά στη συσκευή.

Τα καλώδια της δέσµης καλωδίων ρεύµατоς της

συσκευής ενδέχεται να µην έχоυν τо ίδιо χρώµα µε τα

καλώδια τоυ συνδέσµоυ τоυ оχήµατоς.

carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious

damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the

connector from the car body may be different in color. im Fahrzeug können sich farblich unterscheiden.

Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses

Cut the ISO connector.

Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the

order specified in the illustration below.

Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf.

Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge

anschließen, wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt.

Обрежьте разъем ISO.

Κóψτε τоν συνδετήρα ISO.

Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания

в указанном ниже порядке.

Συνδέστε τα χρωµατιστά καλώδια τη δέσµης

καλωδίων ρεύµατоς, µε τη σειρά πоυ καθоρίζεται

Connect the aerial cord.

Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

Das Antennenkabel anschließen.

Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.

στην εικóνα ανωτέρω.

Подключите кабель антенны.

Συνδέστε τо оµоαξоνικó καλώδιо τη

κεραία

ς.

В последнюю очередь подключите

электропроводку к устройству.

Τέλо

, συνδέστε τо βύσµα τη

δέσµης καλωδίων

ρεύµατо

στη συσκευή.

Rear line out (see diagram

Hinterer Line-Ausgang (siehe Schaltplan

Разъем “line out” заднего динамика (см. схему

Πίσω έξοδος line out (βλ. σχεδιάγραµµα

)

Rear ground terminal / Hintere Erdungsc-

anschlußklemme / Задний разъем заземления /

Ακρoδέκτης γείωσης στo πίσω µέρoς της συσκευής

)

15 A fuse

15 A Sicherung

Предохранитель 15 A

Ασφάλεια 15 A

Aerial terminal

Antennen-

anschlußklemme

Разъем антенны

Ακρoδέκτης κεραίας

Black

To the metallic body or chassis of the car

Ignition switch

Zündschalter

Переключатель

зажигания

Schwarz

Черный

Μαύρo

Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos

К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля

Πρoς µεταλλικó πλαίσιo ή αµάξωµα τoυ oχήµατoς

∆ιακóπτης της

µηχανής

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery

(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

Yellow*²

Gelb*²

Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum

Желтый*²

Κίτρινo*²

Anschließen an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)

К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)

(постоянный 12 В)

Πρoς ακρoδέκτη της ασφαλειoθήκης πoυ τρoφoδoτείται απ’ ευθείας απó την

µπαταρία τoυ oχήµατoς (παρακάµπτoντας τo διακóπτη της µηχανής)

(συνεχής τρoφoδoσία 12 V)

Red

Fuse block

Rot

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

Sicherungsblock

Красный

Κóκκινo

Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock

К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя

Πρoς ακρoδέκτη της ασφαλειoθήκης πoυ τρoφoδoτείται απó τo

διακóπτη της µηχανής

Блок предохранителя

Ασφαλειoθήκη

Blue with white stripe

Blau mit weißem Streifen

Синий с белой полосой

Μπλε µε λευκή ρίγα

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)

Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden (max. 200 mA)

К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)

Πρoς καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ άλλης συσκευής ή ηλεκτρική κεραία, εάν υπάρχει (200 mA τo πoλύ)

Brown

Braun

Коричневый

Καφέ

To cellular phone system

Zur Mobiltelefon

К системе сотового телефона

Πρoς σύστηµα κινητoύ τηλεφώνoυ

Purple with black stripe

Lila mit schwarzem Streifen

Пурпурный с черной

полосой

Purple

Lila

Green with black stripe

White with black stripe

Weiß mit schwarzem

Streifen

Gray with black stripe

Grau mit schwarzem Streifen

Серый с черной полосой

Γκρι µε µαύρη ρίγα

Gray

Grau

Серый

Γκρι

Green

White

Grün mit schwarzem Streifen

Зеленый с черной полосой

Πράσινo µε µαύρη ρίγα

Grün

Weiß

Пурпурный

Μωβ

Зеленый

Πράσινo

Белый

Λευκó

Белый с черной

полосой

Μωβ µε µαύρη ρίγα

Right speaker (rear)

Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)

Правый громкоговоритель

(задний)

Left speaker (front)

Right speaker (front)

Left speaker (rear)

Λευκó µε µαύρη ρίγα

Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)

Левый громкоговоритель (передний)

Αριστερó ηχείo (µπρoστά)

Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)

Правый громкоговоритель (передний)

∆εξί ηχείo (µπρoστά)

Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)

Левый громкоговоритель (задний)

Αριστερó ηχείo (πίσω)

∆εξί ηχείo (πίσω)

Not supplied for this unit.

Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.

Не входит в комплект поставки.

∆ε συµπεριλαµβάνoνται στη συσκευασία της συσκευής

αυτής.

Πρoτoύ ελέγξετε τη λειτoυργία της συσκευής, πριν απó

την εγκατάστασή της, θα πρέπει να συνδέσετε τo καλώδιo

αυτó, διαφoρετικά η συσκευή δε θα τεθεί σε λειτoυργία.

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to

installation, this lead must be connected; otherwise,

the power cannot be turned on.

Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit

des Geräts vor dem Einbau, muß diese Leitung

angeschlossen werden, da sonst die Stromversorgung

nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.

Перед проверкой работы устройства

подключите этот провод, иначе питание не

включится.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer / Anschließen des externen Verstärkers oder Subwoofers / Подключение внешнего

усилителя или низкочастотного динамика / Σύνδεση του εξωτερικού ενισχυτή ή υπογούφερ

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car Sie können einen Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre

Можно подключить усилитель для обновления Μπoρείτε να συνδέσετε έναν ενισχυτή για να

stereo system.

Autostereoanlage zu erweitern.

автомобильной стереосистемы.

• Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства

(синий с белой полосой) к проводу внешнего • Συνδέστε τo καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ (µπλε µε

устройства другого оборудования так, чтобы

им можно было управлять с этого устройства.

• Отсоедините громкоговорители от

данного устройства, подключите

их к усилителю. Оставьте провода

громкоговорителей данного устройства

неиспользованными.

αναβαθµίσετε τo στερεoφωνικó σύστηµα τoυ

αυτoκινήτoυ σας.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white

stripe) to the remote lead of the other

equipment so that it can be controlled through

this unit.

• Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit

weißem Streifen) an das Fernbedienungskabel des

anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses Gerät

gesteuert werden kann.

• Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät

abtrennen und am Verstärker anschließen.

Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses Geräts

unbenutzt lassen.

λευκή ρίγα) µε τo καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ της

άλλης συσκευής, για να µπoρείτε να ελέγχετε τη

δεύτερη µέσω της πρώτης.

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit,

connect them to the amplifier. Leave the

speaker leads of this unit unused.

• Απoσυνδέστε τα ηχεία απó τη συσκευή αυτή

και συνδέστε τα µε τoν ενισχυτή. Αφήστε

τα καλώδια ηχείων της συσκευής αυτής

ασύνδετα.

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Y-Anschluß (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)

Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)

∆ιακλαδωτήρας (δε συμπεριλαμβάνoνται στη συσκευασία

τησ συσκευήσ αυτήσ)

Remote lead

Fernbedienungsleitung

Провод внешнего устройства

Καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ

Remote lead (blue with white stripe)

Fernbedienungsleitung (blau mit weißem Streifen)

Провод внешнего устройства (cиний с белой полосой)

Καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ (µπλε µε λευκή ρίγα)

Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR”

(See page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

Stellen Sie „L/O MODE“ auf „REAR“ (siehe Seite 18

der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).

Для параметра “L/O MODE” установите

значение “REAR” (см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО

ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 18).

Ρυθμίστε το “L/O MODE” (Κατάσταση λειτουργίας

εξόδου Line) στο “REAR” (Απoλαβή ενισχυτή) για

να απoτρέψετε ενδεχόµενη καταστρoφή τoυς (βλ.

σελίδα 18 στις O∆ΗΓΙΕΣ.)

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any

Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden

К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны

Πρoς καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ άλλης συσκευής ή ηλεκτρική κεραία, εάν υπάρχει

Sⁱgnal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)

Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)

Καλώδιo σήµατoς (δε συμπεριλαμβάνoνται στη

συσκευασία τησ συσκευήσ αυτήσ)

Rear speakers

Hintere Lautsprecher

Задние

громкоговорители

JVC Amplifier

JVC Verstärker

JVC-усилитель

Ενισχυτής JVC

Πίσω ηχεία

Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W”

Rear speakers / Hintere Lautsprecher /

(See page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

Задние громкоговорители / Πίσω ηχεία

Stellen Sie „L/O MODE“ auf „SUB.W“ (siehe Seite 18 der

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).

Для параметра “L/O MODE” установите значение

“SUB.W” (см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на

стр. 18).

Front speakers (see diagram

Vordere Lautsprecher (siehe Schaltplan

Передние громкоговорители (см. схему

Εµπρóς ηχεία (βλ. σχεδιάγραµµα

)

Ρυθμίστε το “L/O MODE” (Κατάσταση λειτουργίας εξόδου

Line) στο “SUB.W” (Γούφερ) (Απoλαβή ενισχυτή) για να

απoτρέψετε ενδεχόµενη καταστρoφή τoυς (βλ. σελίδα 18

στις O∆ΗΓΙΕΣ.)

Remote lead

Fernbedienungsleitung

Провод внешнего устройства

Καλώδιo τηλεχειρισµoύ

Subwoofer

Низкочастотный

JVC Amplifier

JVC Verstärker

or / oder / или / ή

JVC-усилитель

Ενισχυτής JVC

динамик

Υπoγoύφερ

Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der Karosserie

Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод

к металлическому кузову или шасси

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body

or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated

with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint

before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may

cause damage to the unit.

Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO

connector and connect them to the amplifier.

Στερεώστε γερά τo καλώδιo γείωσης στo µεταλλικó

πλαίσιo ή τo αµάξωµα τoυ oχήµατoςσε σηµείo πoυ

δεν είναι βαµµένo (σε αντίθετη περίπτωση, ξύστε

τη βαφή πρoτoύ συνδέσετε τo καλώδιo). Αν δεν τo

κάνετε αυτó, είναι δυνατó να πρoκληθεί ζηµιά στη

συσκευή.

Κóψτε τα καλώδια των πίσω ηχείων απó τo

σύνδεσµo ISO τoυ oχήµατoς και συνδέστε τα στoν

ενισχυτή.

oder dem Rahmen des Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle

darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die Kontaktstelle

lackiert sein, entfernen Sie den Lack der Kontaktstelle,

bevor Sie den Leiter befestigen). Wenn der

автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской

(если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску

перед тем, как прикреплять провод).

Невыполнение этого требования может

привести к повреждению данного устройства.

Отрежьте провода задних громкоговорителей

разъема ISO и подсоедините их к усилителю.

Erdungsleiter nicht ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen

wird, kann dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.

Schneiden Sie die hinteren Lautsprecherkabel des

ISO-Steckverbinders des Fahrzeugs ab, und schließen

diese an den Verstärker an.

BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ ΑΝΤΙΜΕΤΩΠΙΣΗ ΠΡOΒΛΗΜΑΤΩΝ

TROUBLESHOOTING

FEHLERSUCHE

• Die Sicherung brennt durch.

* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig

angeschlossen?

• Сработал предохранитель.

* Правильно ли подключены черный и

красный провода?

• Η ασφάλεια καίγεται.

• The fuse blows.

* Είναι τo κόκκινo και τo µαύρo καλώδιo σωστά

συνδεδεµένα;

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• Power cannot be turned on.

• Питание не включается.

* Подключен ли желтый провод?

• Η συσκευή δεν τίθεται σε λειτoυργία.

* Είναι τo κίτρινo καλώδιo συνδεδεµένo;

* Is the yellow lead connected?

• No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• Sound is distorted.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers

grounded in common?

• Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s

chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet

werden.

* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?

• Звук не выводится через

громкоговорители.

* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле

выхода громкоговорителей?

• ∆εν παράγεται ήχoς στα ηχεία.

* Μήπως τo καλώδιo εξόδoυ πρoς τα ηχεία είναι

βραχυκυκλωµένo;

• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.

Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?

• O ήχoς παράγεται µε παραµόρφωση.

* Μήπως τo καλώδιo εξόδoυ πρoς τα ηχεία είναι

γειωµένo;

* Μήπως oι ακρoδέκτες “–” των αριστερών (L) και

των δεξιών (R) ηχείων είναι γειωµένoι σε κoινό

σηµείo;

• Ton verzerrt.

• Звук искажен.

* Заземлен ли провод выхода

громкоговорителей?

* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и

левого (L) громкоговорителей?

* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?

* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und

rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?

• Störgeräusche im Klang.

* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren

und dickeren Kabeln an das Fahrzeugchassis

angeschlossen?

• This unit becomes hot.

• Шум мешает звучанию.

•

O θόρυβoς πρoκαλεί παρεµβoλές στoυς

παραγόµενoυς ήχoυς.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers

grounded in common?

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим

заземления с шасси автомобиля с помощью

более короткого и тонкого шнуров?

* Είναι o πίσω ακρoδέκτης γείωσης συνδεδεµένoς

µε τo αµάξωµα τoυ αυτoκινήτoυ µε κoντύτερo και

παχύτερo καλώδιo;

• Gerät wird heiß.

* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?

* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und

rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?

• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt

nicht.

• Устройство нагревается.

* Заземлен ли провод выхода

громкоговорителей?

* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и

левого (L) громкоговорителей?

• Η συσκευή ζεσταίνεται πoλύ.

* Μήπως τo καλώδιo εξόδoυ πρoς τα ηχεία είναι

γειωµένo;

* Μήπως oι ακρoδέκτες “–” των αριστερών (L) και

των δεξιών (R) ηχείων είναι γειωµένoι σε κoινό

σηµείo;

* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?

• Приемник не работает.

* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?

• O δέκτης αυτός δεν λειτoυργεί καθόλoυ.

* Έχετε επαναφέρει τo δέκτη;

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD RECEIVER

РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ

ПРИЙМАЧ З ПРОГРАВАЧЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКІВ

KD-R407

В соответствии с Законом Российской Федерации “О защите прав потребителей” срок службы (годности) данного

товара “по истечении которого он может представлять опасность для жизни, здоровья потребителя, причинять вред

его имуществу или окружающей среде” составляет семь (7) лет со дня производства. Этот срок является временем,

в течение которого потребитель данного товара может безопасно им пользоваться при условии соблюдения

инструкции по эксплуатации данного товара, проводя необходимое обслуживание, включающее замену расходных

материалов и/или соответствующее ремонтное обеспечение в специализированном сервисном центре.

Дополнительные косметические материалы к данному товару, поставляемые вместе с ним, могут храниться в

течение двух (2) лет со дня его производства.

Срок службы (годности), кроме срока хранения дополнительных косметических материалов, упомянутых

в предыдущих двух пунктах, не затрагивает никаких других прав потребителя, в частности, гарантийного

свидетельства JVC, которое он может получить в соответствии с законом о правах потребителя или других законов,

связанных с ним.

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.

Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 6.

Інформацію щодо відміни демонстрації функцій дисплею див. на стор. 6.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.

Вказівки по встановленню та виконанню підключень наведені у окремій інструкції.

INSTRUCTIONS

ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

ІНСТРУКЦІЇ

GET0575-001A

[EE]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best

possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical

instruments.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to

look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic

[European Union only]

accident.

Caution on volume setting:

Digital devices (CD/USB) produce very little noise

compared with other sources. Lower the volume before

Available characters on the display

Available characters

Display indications

playing these digital sources to avoid damaging the

speakers by sudden increase of the output level.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will

block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any complicated

operations.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold

weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes

normal before operating the unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Detaching the control panel

CONTENTS

Detaching the control panel.........................

Attaching the control panel .........................

How to reset your unit .................................

How to forcibly eject a disc...........................

OPERATIONS

Basic operations...........................................

Preparation..................................................

Listening to the radio...................................

Disc operations............................................. 10

Listening to the USB device.......................... 11

Attaching the control panel

How to reset your unit

EXTERNAL DEVICES

Listening to the other external

components.............................................. 12

SETTINGS

Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 13

Menu operations.......................................... 15

REFERENCES

More about this unit .................................... 18

Troubleshooting........................................... 21

Maintenance................................................ 23

Specifications............................................... 24

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

• You can forcibly eject the loaded disc even if the disc is

locked. To lock/unlock the disc, see page 10.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

This mark is used to indicate...

Turn the control dial to make a

selection, then press to confirm the

selection.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic operations

• FM/AM: Select preset station.

• CD/USB: Select folder.

• Turn on the power.

• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).

• Turn off the power [Hold].

Select the source.

FM = CD*²= USB = AUX IN*³= AM*³=

FM-LO = (back to the beginning)

• Enter list operations.

• Enter Menu setting [Hold].

• Control the volume*⁴or select items [Turn].

• Confirm the selection [Press].

• FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].

• CD/USB: Enter playback mode [Hold].

Pause/resume playback*⁴[Press].

Loading slot

Detach the panel.

Change the display information.

• FM/AM: Search for station.

• CD/USB: Select track.

Return to the previous menu.

AUX (auxiliary) input jack

USB (Universal Serial Bus) input jack

Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.

You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no

disc is in the unit.

You cannot select these sources if they were disabled

in the Menu (see “SRC SELECT” in “Menu

operations” on page 17).

You can still adjust the volume during pause when

the selected source is CD/USB.

Before resume playback, check to be sure that you

have not raise the volume level too much.

Display window

Eject disc.

• Activate/deactivate TA Standby Reception.

• Enter PTY Searching mode [Hold].

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display window

Tr (track) indicator

Source display / Track number / Folder number /

Time countdown indicator

DISC indicator

Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,

ROCK, POPS, USER

Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),

(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)

EQ (equalizer) indicator

LOUD (loudness) indicator

Disc information indicators—

TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)

Main display

Radio Data System indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY

Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),

MO (monaural)

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Searc}O_{h A}P_nE_dR_DA_oT_wI_nO_loN_adS_.

Preparation

Canceling the display demonstration and setting the clock

• See also page 15.

Turn on the power.

Cancel the display demonstrations

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”

Set the clock

Select “CLOCK” = “CLOCK SET.”

Press and hold until

the main menu is

called up.

Adjust the hour, then press control dial once to proceed to adjust

the minute.

[Turn] = [Press]

Repeat this

procedure.

Select “24H/12H,” then “24 HOUR” or “12 HOUR.”

•

• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.

Changing the display information

When the power is turned off: The current clock time is displayed if “CLOCK DISP” is set to “CLOCK OFF,”

(see page 15).

When the power is turned on: The display information of the current source changes as follows:

FM/AM:

Station Frequency = Clock = (back to the beginning)

FM Radio Data System: Station name (PS) = Station Frequency = Programme type (PTY) = Clock =

(back to the beginning)

CD:

Audio CD/CD Text: Disc title/performer*¹= Track title*¹= Current track

number with the elapsed playing time = Current track

number with the clock time = (back to the beginning)

CD/USB:

MP3/WMA:

Album name/performer (folder name)*²= Track title (file

name)*²= Current track number with the elapsed playing

time = Current track number with the clock time = (back

to the beginning)

If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.

If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF” (see page 15),

folder name and file name appear.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Listening to the radio

Select “FM,” “AM,” or “FM-LO.”

Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.

When a station is tuned in, searching stops. To stop searching, press the same

button again.

• You can also search for a station manually—Manual Search. Hold either one of

the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.

• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, the ST

indicator lights up on the display.

Note:

FM:

87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz

FM-LO: 65.00 MHz – 74.00 MHz

Improving the FM reception

Storing stations in memory

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive,

activate monaural mode for better reception.

• See also page 16.

Automatic presetting (FM/FM-LO)—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

You can preset up to 12 stations for FM, and 6 stations

for FM-LO.

While listening to a station...

[Turn] = [Press]

Select the preset number range you want to

store.

FM:

SSM 01–06, SSM 07–12

FM-LO:

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.

• The MO indicator lights up on the display.

SSM 01–06

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator

goes off.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically.

• To stop searching, press 4 /¢

To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.

Continued on the next page

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Searc}O_{h A}P_nE_dR_DA_oT_wI_nO_loN_adS_.

Manual presetting (FM/AM)

You can preset up to 12 stations for FM, 6 stations for

FM-LO, and 6 stations for AM.

The following features are available only for FM

Radio Data System stations.

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset

number “04.”

Searching for FM Radio Data

System programme—PTY Search

You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite

programme by searching for a PTY code.

The last selected PTY code

appears.

Select preset number “04.”

Select one of your favorite programme types

or a PTY code.

Start searching for your favorite programme.

Selecting preset station

If a station is broadcasting a programme of the

same PTY code as you have selected, that station is

tuned in.

[Turn] = [Press]

Using the standby receptions

TA Standby Reception

TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch

temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any

source other than AM and FM-LO.

The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the

current level is lower than the preset level (see

page 16).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To activate TA Standby Reception

The TP (Traffic Programme)

Tracing the same programme—

Network-Tracking Reception

When driving in an area where FM reception is not

sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to

another FM Radio Data System station of the same

network, possibly broadcasting the same programme

with stronger signals (see the illustration below).

indicator either lights up or flashes.

• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is

activated.

• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is

not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening

to an FM station without the Radio Data System

signals required for TA Standby Reception.)

To activate the reception, tune in to another station

providing these signals. The TP indicator will stop

flashing and remain lit.

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas

(01 – 05)

To deactivate the TA Standby Reception

The TP indicator goes off.

PTY Standby Reception

When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking

Reception is activated.

To change the Network-Tracking Reception

setting, see “AF-REG” on page 16.

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch

temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any

source other than AM and FM-LO.

To activate and select your favorite PTY code for

PTY Standby Reception, see page 16.

The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.

• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception

is activated.

Automatic station selection—

Programme Search

Usually when you select a preset number, the station

preset in that number is tuned in.

• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is

not yet activated.

To activate the reception, tune in to another station

providing these signals. The PTY indicator will stop

flashing and remain lit.

If the signals from the FM Radio Data System preset

station are not sufficient for good reception, this

unit, using the AF data, tunes in to another frequency

possibly broadcasting the same programme as the

original preset station is broadcasting.

• The unit takes some time to tune in to another

station using programme search.

• See also page 16.

To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select

“PTY OFF” for the PTY code (see page 16). The PTY

indicator goes off.

PTY codes

NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,

SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY

M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),

WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE

IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),

OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Searc}O_{h A}P_nE_dR_DA_oT_wI_nO_loN_adS_.

Disc operations

Turn on the power.

Insert a disc.

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change

the source or eject the disc.

Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you

to...

Stop playing and ejecting the disc

[Press]Pause/resume playback

• “NO DISC” appears. Press SRC to listen to another

playback source.

MP3/WMA: Select folder

Prohibiting disc ejection

[Press]Select track

[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

Selecting the playback modes

You can use only one of the following playback modes

Selecting a track/folder

at a time.

[Turn] = [Press]

• For MP3/WMA discs, select the desired folder,

then the desired track by repeating the control dial

procedures.

REPEAT Ô RANDOM

• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• To cancel repeat play or random play, select

“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”

[Turn] = [Press]

• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.

REPEAT

TRACK RPT

FOLDER RPT

RANDOM

Repeats current track

MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder

FOLDER RND

MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all

tracks of current folder, then

tracks of next folders

ALL RND

Randomly plays all tracks

Listening to the USB device

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB device.

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or detach the USB device.

USB input jack

USB memory

If a USB device has been attached...

To stop play and detach the USB device

Straightly pull it out from the unit.

• Press SRC to listen to another playback source.

Playback starts from where it has been stopped

previously.

• If a different USB device is currently attached,

playback starts from the beginning.

You can operate the USB device in the same way you

operate the files on a disc. (See pages 10 and 11.)

Continued on the next page

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search}O_AnP_dE_DR_oA_wT_nlI_oO_aN_d.S 11

• You cannot connect a computer to the USB input

terminal of the unit.

• Make sure all important data has been backed up to

avoid losing the data.

• Do not leave a USB device in the car, expose to direct

sunlight, or high temperature to avoid deformation

or cause damages to the device.

• Some USB devices may not work immediately after

you turn on the power.

Cautions:

• Avoid using the USB device if it might hinder your

safety driving.

• Do not pull out and attach the USB device repeatedly

while “READING” is shown on the display.

• Do not start the car engine if a USB device is

connected.

• This unit may not be able to play the files depending

on the type of USB device.

• Operation and power supply may not work as

intended for some USB devices.

• For more details about USB operations, see page 20.

Listening to the other external components

You can connect an external component to AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.

Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting, see page 17.

Select “AUX IN.”

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

Adjust the volume.

—

Adjust the sound as you want (see pages 13 and 14).

—

Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack

Portable audio player, etc.

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

(not supplied)

12 O_DP_oE_wR_nA_loT_aI_dO_frN_omS _W&_wE_wX_.T_SE_omR_aN_nA_uaL_lsD_.cE_omV_.IC_AE_llS_{Manuals Search And Download.}

Selecting a preset sound mode

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.

• See also page 15.

[Turn] = [Press]

• See page 14 for “USER” settings.

Preset value setting for each sound mode

Preset value

Sound

mode

BASS

MIDDLE

TREBLE

LOUD

(loudness)

Freq. Level

USER

60 Hz

100 Hz

80 Hz

00 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

+03 Q1.0 1.0 kHz

+01 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

+02 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

+04 Q1.0 1.0 kHz

+03 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

00 Q1.0 10.0 kHz

00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz

+01 Q1.25 10.0 kHz

–02 Q1.0 10.0 kHz

00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz

+02

+03

+02

+01

+03

—

ROCK

CLASSIC

POPS

OFF

100 Hz

60 Hz

HIP HOP

JAZZ

80 Hz

Freq.: Frequency Q: Q-slope

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And}S_DE_oT_wT_nI_loN_aG_d.S 13

Storing your own sound mode

You can store your own adjustments in memory.

Adjust the sound elements of the selected

tone.

Select “USER” for “EQ.”

[Turn] = [Press]

Adjust the frequency.

Adjust the level.

Adjust the Q-slope.

[Turn] = [Press]

Range/selectable items

BASS MIDDLE TREBLE

Sound

elements

Frequency

60 Hz

80 Hz

0.5 kHz 10.0 kHz

1.0 kHz 12.5 kHz

While “USER” is shown on the display...

100 Hz 1.5 kHz 15.0 kHz

200 Hz 2.5 kHz 17.5 kHz

Level

–06 to –06 to –06 to

+06

Q1.0

Q1.25

Q1.5

Q2.0

Q0.75

Q1.0

Q1.25

Fixed

Select a tone.

[Turn] = [Press]

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other sound

characteristics.

The adjustment made will be stored automatically.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Menu operations

Call up the menu.

Select the desired item.

[Turn] = [Press]

Repeat step 2 if necessary.

• To return to the previous menu,

press BACK.

• To exit from the menu, press

DISP or MENU.

Initial: Underlined

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DEMO

Display

demonstration

CLOCK DISP*¹

• DEMO ON

Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].

Cancels.

• DEMO OFF

• CLOCK ON

Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the

power is turned off.

Clock display

• CLOCK OFF

Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about

5 seconds when the power is turned off, [6].

CLOCK SET

Clock setting

Adjust the hour, then the minute, [6].

(Initial: 0:00)

• 24 HOUR

24H/12H

See also page 6 for setting.

Time display mode • 12 HOUR

CLOCK ADJ *²

Clock adjustment

• AUTO

The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT

(clock time) data in the Radio Data System signal.

Cancels.

• OFF

Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.

Equalizer

USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ

DIMMER

Dimmer

• DIMMER ON

• DIMMER OFF

Dims the display and button illumination.

Cancels.

SCROLL*³

Scroll

• SCROLL ONCE

• SCROLL AUTO

• SCROLL OFF

Scrolls the displayed information once.

Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).

Cancels.

Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the

setting.

TAG DISPLAY

• TAG ON

Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA

Tag display

tracks.

• TAG OFF

Cancels.

If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select

“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.

Takes effect only when CT data is received.

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Continued on the next page

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And}S_DE_oT_wT_nI_loN_aG_d.S 15

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

AF-REG *⁴

Alternative

frequency/

regionalization

reception

• AF ON

When the currently received signals become weak, the unit

switches to another station (the programme may differ

from the one currently received), [9].

• The AF indicator lights up.

When the currently received signals become weak, the

unit switches to another station broadcasting the same

programme.

• AF-REG ON

• OFF

• The AF and REG indicators light up.

Cancels.

PTY-STANDBY *⁴PTY OFF, PTY

PTY standby

Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY

codes, [9].

codes

TA VOLUME *⁴

Traffic

announcement

volume

VOLUME 00

(Initial: VOLUME 15)

– VOLUME 50

(or VOLUME 00

– VOLUME 30)*⁵

P-SEARCH *⁴

Programme search • SEARCH OFF

• SEARCH ON

Activates Programme Search, [9].

Cancels.

MONO*⁶

Monaural mode

• MONO ON

Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but

stereo effect will be lost, [7].

• MONO OFF

• AUTO

Restore the stereo effect.

IF BAND

Intermediate

frequency band

Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises

between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)

Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but

sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect

will remain.

• WIDE

FADER*^7,*⁸

Fader

BALANCE*⁸

Balance

R06 – F06

L06 – R06

Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.

(Initial: 00)

Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.

(Initial: 00)

LOUD

Loudness

• LOUD OFF

• LOUD ON

Cancels.

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced

sound at a low volume level.

Only for FM Radio Data System stations.

Depends on the amplifier gain control.

Displayed only when the source is “FM.”

If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”

This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

VOL ADJUST

Volume adjust

VOL ADJ –05 —

VOL ADJ +05

(Initial: VOL ADJ

00)

Preset the volume adjustment level of each source (except

FM), compared to the FM volume level. The volume level

will automatically increase or decrease when you change

the source.

• Before making an adjustment, select the source you

want to adjust.

• “VOL ADJ FIX” appears on the display if “FM” is selected

as the source.

L/O MODE

Line output mode

• SUB.W

• REAR

Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for

connecting a subwoofer (through an external amplifier).

Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for

connecting the speakers (through an external amplifier).

SUB.W FREQ*⁹

Subwoofer cutoff • MID

frequency

• LOW

• HIGH

Frequencies lower than 72 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

Frequencies lower than 111 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

Frequencies lower than 157 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

SUB.W LEVEL*⁹SUB.W 00

Adjust the subwoofer output level.

(Initial: SUB.W 04)

Subwoofer level

— SUB.W 08

BEEP

Keypress tone

• BEEP OFF

• BEEP ON

Deactivates the keypress tone.

Activates the keypress tone.

TEL MUTING

Telephone

muting

• MUTING 1/

MUTING 2

• MUTING OFF

Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a

cellular phone.

Cancels.

AMP GAIN*¹⁰

Amplifier gain

control

• LOW POWER

VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power

of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the

speaker.)

• HIGH POWER

VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50

AM*¹¹

AM station

• AM OFF

• AM ON

Disable “AM” in source selection.

Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].

AUX IN*¹²

Auxiliary input

• AUX OFF

• AUX ON

Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.

Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].

Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”

*¹⁰The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level

set higher than “VOLUME 30.”

¹¹Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.

¹²Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And}S_DE_oT_wT_nI_loN_aG_d.S 17

More about this unit

FM Radio Data System operations

Basic operations

• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types

of Radio Data System signals—PI (Programme

Identification) and AF (Alternative Frequency)

to work correctly. Without receiving these data

correctly, Network-Tracking Reception will not

operate correctly.

• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby

Reception, the volume level automatically changes to

the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower

than the preset level.

Turning on the power

• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn

on the power. If the source is ready, playback also

starts.

Turning off the power

• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,

playback will start from where it had been stopped

previously next time you turn on the power.

• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated

(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is

also activated automatically.

General

• If you change the source while listening to a disc,

playback stops.

Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,

playback will start from where it had been stopped

previously.

• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after

pressing MENU button, the operation will be

canceled.

Disc operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply

with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.

Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on

this product may not be recommended.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

General

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs

(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA

formats.

• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and

“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to

eject the disc.

• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are

used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or

WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.

• During SSM search...

– All previously stored stations are erased and the

stations are stored anew.

– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest

preset number will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the previously

preset station is erased when a new station is stored

in the same preset number.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the

conditions below:

– Bit rate of MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of MP3:

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (for MPEG-1)

16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Bit rate of WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of WMA:

22.05 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,

Joliet, Windows extension.

• The maximum number of characters for file/folder

names vary depending on the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo: up to 64 characters

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can only play back files of the same type as

those detected first if a disc includes both audio CD

(CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,

unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this

unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the

following reasons:

– Discs are dirty or scratched.

– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens

inside the unit.

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the

“Packet Write” method.

– There are improper recording conditions (missing

data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,

warped, etc.).

– Joliet: up to 32 characters

– Windows extension: up to 32 characters

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,

255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable

bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the

elapsed time display, and do not show the actual

elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes

noticeable after performing the search function.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and

voice format.

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the

reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular

CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck

to the surface.

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an

ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperature or high

humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the

unit.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of

the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums, artists

(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

– WMA files which are not based upon Windows

Media® Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is not

constant.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• This unit may not play back files in a USB device

properly when using a USB extension cord.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and

voice format.

– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB device

• While playing from a USB device, the playback order

may differ from other players.

• This unit may be unable to play back some USB

devices or some files due to their characteristics or

recording conditions.

• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and

connection ports, some USB devices may not be

attached properly or the connection might be loose.

• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the unit

at a time. Do not use a USB hub.

Ejecting a disc or removing a USB device

• If the connected USB device does not have the correct

files, “CANNOT PLAY” appears.

• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the

conditions below:

– Bit rate of MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of MP3:

• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,

it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again

to protect it from dust.

• After ejecting a disc or removing a USB device,

“NO DISC” or “NO USB“ appears and you cannot

operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,

reattach a USB device, or press SRC to select another

playback source.

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (for MPEG-1)

16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Bit rate of WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of WMA:

22.05 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR

(variable bit rate).

Menu operations

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from

“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while

the volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,”

the unit automatically changes the volume level to

“VOLUME 30.”

• The maximum number of characters for:

– Folder names : 32 characters

– File names : 32 characters

– MP3 Tag : 32 characters

– WMA Tag : 32 characters

• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files, 255

folders (255 files per folder including folder without

unsupported files), and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit does not support SD card reader.

• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating

is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.

• USB devices equipped with special functions such as

data security functions cannot be used with the unit.

• Do not use a USB device with 2 or more partitions.

• This unit may not recognized a USB device connected

through a USB card reader.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

• The unit does not work at all.

• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.

Reset the unit (see page 3).

Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see

page 17).

• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

• “AM” cannot be selected.

Connect the aerial firmly.

Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see

page 17).

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be

skipped.

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which

you used for recording.

• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Check the cords and connections.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.

• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately

on the display.

Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format

compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or

Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the

file names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA

tracks.)

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• A longer readout time is required

Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.

(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).

• Tracks do not play back in the order you

have intended them to play.

The playback order is determined when the files are

recorded.

• The elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by

how the tracks are recorded on the disc.

• “NO FILE” appears on the display.

Selected folder is an empty folder*. Select another folder

that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains

data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.

• The correct characters are not displayed

(e.g. album name).

This unit can only display Roman alphabets (upper case),

Cyrillic alphabets (upper case), numbers, and a limited

number of symbols (see page 2).

• Noise is generated.

The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to

another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or

<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

• “READING” keeps flashing on the display. • Readout time varies depending on the USB device.

• Do not use too many hierarchy or folders.

• Turn off the power then on again.

• Reattach the USB device again.

• “NO FILE” appears on the display.

Selected folder is an empty folder*. Select another folder

that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains

data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.

• Tracks/folders are not played back in the

order you have intended.

The playback order is determined by the write-in time

stamp. The first track/folder written into the USB device

will be the first track/folder for playback.

• “CANNOT PLAY” flashes on the display.

• “NO USB” appears on the display.

• Attach a USB device that contains tracks encoded in an

appropriate format.

• The unit cannot detect the USB device.

• Reattach the USB device again.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display Roman alphabets (upper case),

Cyrillic alphabets (upper case), numbers, and a limited

number of symbols (see page 2).

• While playing a track, sound is sometimes The MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into

interrupted.

the USB device.

Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB device, and

try again.

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance

How to clean the connectors

To keep discs clean

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the

connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with

alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with

a soft cloth in a straight line from center

to edge.

• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional

record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean

discs.

Connectors

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough spots

around the inner and outer edges. If

such a disc is used, this unit may reject

the disc.

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in

the following cases:

• After starting the heater in the car.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a

pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this

case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a

few hours until the moisture has evaporated.

Do not use the following discs:

Single CD (8 cm disc)

Warped disc

How to handle discs

When removing a disc from its

case, press down the center holder

of the case and lift the disc out,

holding it by the edges.

Center holder

Sticker and sticker residue

Stick-on label

• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its

recording surface.

When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the

disc around the center holder (with the printed surface

facing up).

C-thru Disc (semi-

transparent disc)

Unusual shape

• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.

Transparent or semi-

transparent parts on its

recording area

REFERENCES 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

Maximum Power Output:

Front/Rear:

50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

at no more than 0.8% total harmonic

distortion.

Load Impedance:

4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Tone Control Range:

Bass:

12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz)

Q1.0, Q1.25, Q1.5, Q2.0

Middle:

Treble:

12 dB (0.5 kHz, 1.0 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 2.5 kHz)

Q0.75, Q1.0, Q1.25

12 dB (10.0 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15.0 kHz,

17.5 kHz)

Q = Fixed

Frequency Response:

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

Output Impedance:

70 dB

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

1 kΩ

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

Other Terminal:

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

USB input jack, AUX (auxiliary) input jack

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

65.00 MHz to 74.00 MHZ

FM-LO:

AM:

MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz

LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz

FM Tuner

Usable Sensitivity:

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):

Frequency Response:

Stereo Separation:

Sensitivity:

65 dB

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

30 dB

MW Tuner

20 μV

Selectivity:

35 dB

LW Tuner

Sensitivity:

50 μV

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD PLAYER SECTION

Type:

Compact disc player

Signal Detection System:

Non-contact optical pickup

(semiconductor laser)

Number of Channels:

2 channels (stereo)

5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

93 dB

Frequency Response:

Dynamic Range:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

98 dB

Wow and Flutter:

Less than measurable limit

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)

WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:

USB SECTION

USB Standard:

USB 1.1, USB 2.0

Max. 12 Mbps

Mass storage class

FAT 32/16/12

Data Transfer Rate (Full Speed):

Compatible Device:

Compatible File System:

Playable Audio Format:

Max. Current:

MP3/WMA

DC 5 V 500 mA

GENERAL

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Negative ground

Grounding System:

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:

182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm

188 mm × 58 mm × 12 mm

1.3 kg (excluding accessories)

Panel Size:

Mass:

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

REFERENCES 25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Затруднения при эксплуатации?

Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство

Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства

обратитесь на соответствующую страницу

Маєте ПРОБЛЕМУ з функціонуванням?

Повторно налаштуйте систему

Див. сторінку “Як повторно налаштувати пристрій”

Bіктор Компані оф Джепен Лімітед

12, 3-чоме, Морійя-чо, Канагава-ку, Йокогама, Канагава 221-8520, Японія

EN, RU, UK

1008DTSMDTJEIN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KD-R407

Installation/Connection Manual

Руководство по установке/подключению

Керівництво зі встановлення та з’єднання

1008DTSMDTJEIN

EN, RU, UK

GET0575-002A

[EE]

ENGLISH

РУССКИЙ

УКРАЇНА

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground

electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a

voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR

ENTERTAINMENT dealers.

Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В

постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе. Если Ваш

автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор

напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера

автомобилнего специалиста JVC.

Цей пристрій призначений для роботи під напругою 12 В

постійного струму; з електричними системами, що мають

заземлення ВІД’ЄМНОГО полюсу. Якщо ваше авто не

оснащене такою системою, потрібно використовувати інвертор

напруги, який можна придбати у дилерів устаткування JVC для

автомобілів.

WARNINGS

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ

ПОПЕРЕДЖЕННЯ

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the

Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем

Для запобігання коротким замиканням рекомендується

перед встановленням пристрою відключити від’ємну клему

акумулятора та виконати усі електричні з’єднання.

battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и

installing the unit.

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after

installation.

осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.

• После установки обязательно заземлите данное

устройство на шасси автомобиля.

• Переконайтеся у тому, що після закінчення встановлення

пристрою, виконано його заземлення на шасі авто.

Notes:

Примечания:

Примітки:

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows

frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power

of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an

impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than

50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from

being damaged (see page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads

with insulating tape.

• Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем

указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком

часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.

• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной

мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели

устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если

максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в

режим “AMP GAIN”, чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.

ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 17).

• Для предотвращения коротких замыканий обмотайте

терминалы НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫХ проводов изоляционной

лентой.

• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.

Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.

• Заміняти запобіжник можна тільки запобіжником із вказаними

у специфікації номінальними характеристиками. Якщо

запобіжники часто виходять з ладу, проконсультуйтеся з

дилером устаткування JVC для автомобілів.

• Рекомендується підключати гучномовці з максимальною

потужністю, що перевищує 50 Вт (як для розташованих

спереду, так і для тих, що розміщуються позаду.

Рекомендований діапазон опору: від 4 до 8 Ом). У разі, якщо

потужність є меншою чим 50 Вт, змініть налаштування

“AMP GAIN” (коефіцієнт підсилення) задля запобігання

пошкодженню гучномовців (див. стор. 17 “ІНСТРУКЦІЇ”).

• Для запобігання коротким замиканням, заізолюйте клеми

провідника, ЩО НЕ ВИКОРИСТОВУЄТЬСЯ, ізоляційною

стрічкою.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it

when removing this unit.

• По закінчені роботи радіатор стає надто гарячим. Будьте

обережні, не торкайтесь його при видалені цього пристрою.

Heat sink / Радиатор / Радіатор

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и

подключению громкоговорителей:

ЗАСТЕРЕЖЕННЯ щодо приєднання джерела

connections:

живлення та гучномовців:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the

car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the

speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

•

НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к аккумулятору

автомобиля, иначе устройство будет повреждено.

• НЕ з’єднуйте провідники живлення гучномовців з

акумулятором. Невиконання такої вимоги призведе до

тяжкого ушкодження пристрою.

• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей к кабелю

питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему соединений

громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.

• ПЕРЕД тим, як з’єднати провідники живлення з

гучномовцями, перевірте схему з’єднання гучномовців

вашого авто.

Parts list for installation and connection

The following parts are provided for this unit.

If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR

ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.

Список деталей для установки и

Перелік деталей для встановлення та з’єднання

У комплекті з цим пристроєм надаються такі деталі.

Якщо будь-яка з цих деталей відсутня, негайно зверніться до

дилера устаткування JVC для автомобілів.

подключения

Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.

При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с

дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.

A / B

Hard case/Control panel

Жесткий футляр/панель управления

Жорсткий футляр/Панель управління

Sleeve

Муфта

Екран

Trim plate

Декоративную панель

Знімна пластина

Lock nut (M5)

Фиксирующая гайка (M5)

Стопорна гайка (М5)

Power cord

Кабель питания

Шнур живлення

Washer (ø5)

Шайба (њ5)

Шайба (ø5)

Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)

Крепежный болт (M4 × 5 мм; M5 × 12.5 мм)

Монтажний болт (M4 × 5 мм; M5 × 12.5 мм)

Handles

Рычаги

Ручки

Rubber cushion

Резиновый чехол

Гумова прокладка

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION

ВСТАНОВЛЕННЯ

УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В

ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)

(IN-DASH MOUNTING)

(МОНТАЖ НА ПРИЛАДОВУ ПАНЕЛЬ)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have

any questions or require information regarding installation kits,

consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company

supplying kits.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed

by a qualified technician.

Наведена нижче ілюстрація демонструє типовий процес

встановлення. У разі будь яких запитань або потреби у

інформації щодо набору інструментів та спорядження,

проконсультуйтеся з дилером устаткування JVC для автомобілів

або з компанією, що постачає набір інструментів та спорядження.

• Якщо ви не впевнені щодо правильності встановлення цього

пристрою, залучіть до його встановлення кваліфікованого

спеціаліста.

На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка.

Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, касающиеся установки,

обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста

JVC или в компанию, поставляющую соответствующие

принадлежности.

• Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это

устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.

Do the required electrical connections.

Выполните необходимые подключения

контактов, как показано на оборотной

стороне этой инструкции.

Виконайте потрібні електричні

з’єднання.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

Отогните соответствующие

фиксаторы, предназначенные для

прочной установки корпуса.

Зігніть відповідні фіксатори для

надійного встановлення екрану на

його місці.

Removing the unit

Удаление устройства

Видалення пристрою

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.

Перед видаленням пристрою, ослабте кріплення тильної частини.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их,

как показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть

устройство.

Вставте дві ручки, а потім потягніть їх на

себе згідно з ілюстрацією, щоби витягти

пристрій.

When using the optional stay / При использовании

дополнительной стойки / Використання додаткової

стійки (постачається за окремим замовленням)

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / При установке устройства

без использования муфты / Встановлення пристрою без екрану

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите

устройство на место.

У таких авто, як, наприклад, “Тойота”, спершу зніміть радіоприймач, а на його місце встановіть пристрій.

Fire wall

Стена

Вогнестійка стінка

Stay (option)

Стойка (дополнительно)

Стійка (на замовлення)

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Болты с плоской головкой (M5 × 8 мм)*²

Гвинти з пласкими голівками (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Dashboard

Приборная панель

Приладова панель

Bracket*²

Кронштейн*²

Screw (option)

Винт (дополнительно)

Гвинт (на замовлення)

Pocket

Карман

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Bracket*²

Болты с плоской головкой (M5 × 8 мм)*²

Кронштейн*²

Гвинти з пласкими голівками (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Кронштейн*²

Note

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If

longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.

Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.

Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.

Встановіть пристрій під кутом меншим, ніж 30˚.

8 мм. При использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.

: Встановлюючи пристрій на монтажні кронштейни, переконайтеся, що застосовуються

Примітка

гвинти довжиною 8 мм. Якщо гвинти довші, вони можуть пошкодити пристрій.

When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the

rear.

Not supplied for this unit.

При встановленні пристрою, будьте обережні, не пошкодьте

запобіжник, розташований у тильній частині.

Не входить до комплекту постачання цього пристрою.

Устанавливайте устройство таким образом, чтобы не повредить

предохранитель, расположенный сзади.

Не входят в комплект.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

РУССКИЙ

УКРАЇНА

ENGLISH

ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

ЕЛЕКТРИЧНІ З’ЄДНАННЯ

If your car is equipped with the ISO

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobiles / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi

или Opel (Vauxhall) / Для деяких авто марки VW/Audi або Opel (Vauxhall)

connector / Если автомобиль оснащен

разъемом ISO / Якщо ваше авто оснащене

розніманням за стандартом ISO

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.

• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.

Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.

• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.

Вам, можливо, прийдеться внести зміни до з’єднання провідників шнура живлення згідно з ілюстрацією.

• Перед тим, як встановлювати цей пристрій, зв’яжіться з уповноваженим дилером вашого авто.

• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.

• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.

• Приєднайте рознімання ISO, як рекомендовано на ілюстрації.

Original wiring / Исходная схема соединений / Початкова

схема з’єднання рознімань

Modified wiring 1 / Преобразованная схема соединений 1 / Змінена схема

з’єднання рознімань 1

From the car body

От корпуса автомобиля

Від корпусу авто

ISO connector

Разъем ISO

Рознімання ISO

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.

Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему соединений 2.

Якщо пристрій не включається, скористуйтеся зміненою схемою з’єднання

рознімань 2.

ISO connector of the supplied power cord

Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в

комплект поставки

Рознімання ISO шнура живлення, що

входить до комплекту постачання

Y: Yellow

Желтый

Жовтий

R: Red

Красный

Червоний

Modified wiring 2 / Преобразованная схема соединений 2 / Змінена схема

з’єднання рознімань 2

View from the lead side

Вид со стороны выводов

Вид зі сторони електричних виводів

Connections without using the ISO connector / Подключение без использования разъема ISO / З’єднання без допомоги з’єднувача ISO

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.

Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.

Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте

проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может

Перед тим, як з’єднати: Уважно перевірте електричну

схему з’єднання вашого авто Неправильне з’єднання може

спричинити тяжке пошкодження вашого пристрою.

Контакти шнура живлення та рознімання, яке йде від корпуса

авто можуть мати різні кольори.

body may be different in color.

Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова

автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.

1 Cut the ISO connector.

1 Від’єднайте рознімання ISO.

1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.

2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order

2 З’єднайте кольорові провідники шнура живлення у порядку,

2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в указанном

specified in the illustration below.

що наведений нижче на ілюстрації.

ниже порядке.

3 Connect the aerial cord.

4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

3 Приєднайте провід антени.

3 Подключите кабель антенны.

Виконайте кінцеве приєднання джгута провідників до пристрою.

В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к устройству.

Rear ground terminal

Задний разъем заземления

Rear line out (see diagram

)

Разъем “line out” заднего динамика (см. схему

)

Тильна клема заземлення

Задній лінійний вихід (див. схему

)

15 A fuse

Предохранитель 15 A

Запобіжник 15 А

Aerial terminal

Разъем антенны

Рознімання антени

Ignition switch

Black

Переключатель зажигания

Черный

Перемикач запалювання

Чорний

To metallic body or chassis of the car

К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля

На металічний корпус або на шасі авто

Yellow*²

Желтый*²

Жовтий*²

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery

(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)

(постоянный 12 В)

На клему фази у блоці запобіжників для з’єднання з акумулятором

авто (обминаючи перемикач запалення)—постійний струм 12 В

Red

Fuse block

Блок предохранителя

Блок запобіжників

Красный

Червоний

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя

На допоміжну клему у блоці запобіжників

Blue with white stripe

Синий с белой полосой

Синій із білою смужкою

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)

К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)

На провідник зовнішнього пристрою іншого обладнання або на антену (якщо

встановлена) (максимальний струм 200 мА)

Brown

Коричневый

Коричневий

To cellular phone system

К системе сотового телефона

На систему стільникового телефону

White with black stripe

Белый с черной

полосой

White

Белый

Білий

Gray with black stripe

Серый с черной полосой

Сірий з чорною смужкою

Gray

Green with black stripe

Green

Purple with black stripe

Пурпурный с черной полосой

Пурпурний з чорною смужкою

Purple

Серый

Зеленый с черной полосой

Зеленый

Зелений

Пурпурный

Пурпурний

Сірий

Зелений з чорною смужкою

Білий з чорною

смужкою

Right speaker (rear)

Правый громкоговоритель

(задний)

Left speaker (front)

Right speaker (front)

Left speaker (rear)

Левый громкоговоритель (передний)

Лівий гучномовець (передній)

Правый громкоговоритель (передний)

Правий гучномовець (передній)

Левый громкоговоритель (задний)

Лівий гучномовець (задній)

Правий гучномовець

(задній)

Не входит в комплект.

Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот провод,

иначе питание не включится.

Not supplied for this unit.

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead

must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.

Не входить до комплекту постачання цього пристрою.

Перед тим, як перевірити працездатність цього виробу до його

встановлення, цей контакт необхідно приєднати, інакше живлення

на прилад подаватися не буде.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer / Подключение внешнего усилителя или низкочастотного динамика / Приєднання

зовнішнього підсилювача або низькочастотного динаміка

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.

Для покращення характеристик стереосистеми, до неї можна

підключити підсилювач.

• Підключіть провідник зовнішнього пристрою (синій з білою

смужкою) до провідника зовнішнього пристрою іншого

обладнання. Таким чином, ним можна буде керувати з цього

пристрою.

Можно подключить усилители для обновления автомобильной

стереосистемы.

• Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с

белой полосой) к проводу внешнего устройства другого

оборудования так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого

устройства.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote

lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through

this unit.

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to

the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.

• Відключіть гучномовці від цього пристрою, приєднайте

їх до підсилювача. Залиште провідники гучномовців

такими, що не використовуються.

• Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного

устройства, подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте

провода громкоговорителей данного устройства

неиспользованными.

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)

Y-рознімання (двійник) (не входить до комплекту

постачання даного пристрою)

Remote lead

Провод внешнего устройства

Провідник зовнішнього пристрою

Remote lead (blue with white stripe)

Провод внешнего устройства (синий с белой полосой)

Провідник зовнішнього пристрою (синій із білою смужкою)

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any

К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны

На провідник зовнішнього пристрою іншого обладнання

або на антену (якщо встановлена)

Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 17 of the

INSTRUCTIONS.)

Для настройки “L/O MODE” установите значение “REAR”

(см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 17.)

У налаштуваннях режиму лінійного виходу (L/O MODE)

задати REAR (задні колонки) - (див. стор. 17 цієї

ІНСТРУКЦІЇ).

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)

Сигнальний шнур (не входить до комплекту

постачання даного пристрою)

Rear speakers

JVC Amplifier

Задние

JVC-усилитель

громкоговорители

Підсилювач JVC

Задні гучномовці

Rear speakers

Задние громкоговорители

Задні гучномовці

Front speakers (see diagram

Передние громкоговорители (см. схему

Передні гучномовці (див. схему

Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W” (See page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

Для настройки “L/O MODE” установите значение “SUB.W” (см.

стр. 17 ИНСТРУКЦИЙ).

У налаштуваннях режиму лінійного виходу (L/O MODE)

задати SUB.W (низькочастотний динамік) - (див. стор. 17 цієї

ІНСТРУКЦІЇ).

)

Remote lead

Провод внешнего устройства

Провідник зовнішнього пристрою

или

або

Subwoofer

JVC Amplifier

Низкочастотный

JVC-усилитель

динамик

Низькочастотний

динамік

Підсилювач JVC

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of

the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove

the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage

to the unit.

Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect them

to the amplifier.

Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод к металлическому

кузову или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской

(если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску перед тем, как

прикреплять провод). Невыполнение этого требования может

привести к повреждению данного устройства.

Обрежьте выводы задних динамиков для разъема ISO

автомобиля и подсоедините их к усилителю.

Надійно прикрутіть провідник заземлення до металічного корпусу

або до шасі авто у місці, яке не має фарбового покриття (якщо

воно є, видаліть фарбу до підключення провідника). Невиконання

цієї вимоги може призвести до пошкодження пристрою.

Відключіть провідники задніх гучномовців від рознімання ISO, що

належить до авто, та з’єднайте їх із підсилювачем.

BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ

TROUBLESHOOTING

НЕСПРАВНОСТІ

• Сработал предохранитель.

• The fuse blows.

• Вийшов з ладу запобіжник.

* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

* Чи правильно приєднані червоний та чорний провідники?

• Питание не включается.

* Подключен ли желтый провод?

• Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

• Не можна включити живлення.

* Чи приєднаний жовтий провідник?

• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.

* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода

громкоговорителей?

• No sound from the speakers.

• Звук з гучномовців відсутній.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

* Чи не замкнуто “на коротко” вихідні провідники гучномовця?

• Sound is distorted.

• Звук спотворений.

• Звук искажен.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Чи не заземлені вихідні провідники гучномовця?

* Чи заземлені разом провідники “–” лівого та правого

гучномовця?

* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?

* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)

громкоговорителей?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using

shorter and thicker cords?

• Звук чути з перешкодами.

* Чи приєднано тильну клему заземлення до шасі авто за

допомогою коротших та товстіших шнурів?

• Шум мешает звучанию.

* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси

автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?

• This unit becomes hot.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

• Пристрій нагрівається.

• Устройство нагревается.

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* Чи не заземлені вихідні провідники гучномовця?

* Чи заземлені разом провідники “–” лівого та правого

гучномовця?

* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?

* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)

громкоговорителей?

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

• Цей пристрій не працює взагалі.

* Чи ви переналаштовували пристрій?

• Приемник не работает.

* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD RECEIVER

KD-R504

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS

GET0585-001A

[UI]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best

possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical

instruments.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will

block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any complicated

operations.

[European Union only]

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold

weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes

normal before operating the unit.

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to

look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic

accident.

This mark is used to indicate...

Caution on volume setting:

Turn the control dial to make a

Digital devices (CD/USB) produce very little noise

selection, then press to confirm the

compared with other sources. Lower the volume before

selection.

playing these digital sources to avoid damaging the

speakers by sudden increase of the output level.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Detaching the control panel

CONTENTS

Detaching the control panel.........................

Attaching the control panel .........................

How to reset your unit .................................

How to forcibly eject a disc...........................

OPERATIONS

Basic operations...........................................

• Using the control panel...............................

• Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)......

Preparation..................................................

Listening to the radio...................................

Disc operations.............................................

Attaching the control panel

How to reset your unit

Listening to the USB device.......................... 10

EXTERNAL DEVICES

Listening to the other external

components.............................................. 11

SETTINGS

Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 12

Title assignment .......................................... 13

Menu operations.......................................... 14

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

REFERENCES

More about this unit .................................... 16

Troubleshooting........................................... 19

Maintenance................................................ 21

Specifications............................................... 22

How to forcibly eject a disc

• You can forcibly eject the loaded disc even if the disc is

locked. To lock/unlock the disc, see page 9.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic operations

Using the control panel

• FM/AM: Select preset station.

• CD/USB: Select folder.

• Turn on the power.

• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).

• Turn off the power [Hold].

Select the source.

FM = AM*²= CD*³= USB = AUX IN*²=

(back to the beginning)

Detach the panel.

Change the display information.

• FM/AM: Search for station.

• CD/USB: Select track.

Return to the previous menu.

Remote sensor

AUX (auxiliary) input jack

USB (Universal Serial Bus) input jack

• Enter list operations.

• Enter Menu setting [Hold].

• Control the volume*⁴or select items [Turn].

• Confirm the selection [Press].

• FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].

• CD/USB: Enter playback mode [Hold].

Pause/resume playback*⁴[Press].

Loading slot

Display window

Eject disc.

Select the sound mode.

Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.

You cannot select these sources if they were disabled

in the Menu (see “SRC SELECT” in “Menu

operations” on page 16).

You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no

disc is in the unit.

You can still adjust the volume during pause when

the selected source is CD/USB.

Before resume playback, check to be sure that you

have not raise the volume level too much.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display window

Tr (track) indicator

Source display / Track number / Folder number /

Time countdown indicator

DISC indicator

Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,

ROCK, POPS, USER

EQ (equalizer) indicator

LOUD (loudness) indicator

Disc information indicators—

TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)

Main display

Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),

MO (monaural)

Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),

(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)

OPERATIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)

Installing the lithium coin battery (CR2025)

Caution:

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire, or the like.

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is on.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

• Changes the preset stations.

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.

Adjusts the volume level.

Selects the sound mode.

Selects the source.

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and

held.

If the effectiveness of the remote controller

decreases, replace the battery.

Before using the remote controller:

• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote

sensor on the unit.

• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light

(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

Warning (to prevent accidents and damage):

• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its

equivalent.

• Do not leave the remote controller in a place (such

as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight for a long

time.

Remote sensor

• Store the battery in a place where children cannot

reach.

• Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery,

or dispose of it in a fire.

• Do not leave the battery with other metallic

materials.

• Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar

tools.

• Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when

throwing away or saving it.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preparation

Canceling the display demonstration and setting the clock

• See also page 14.

Turn on the power.

Cancel the display demonstrations

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”

Set the clock

Press and hold until

the main menu is

Select “CLOCK” = “CLOCK SET.”

called up.

Adjust the hour, then press control dial once to proceed to adjust

the minute.

[Turn] = [Press]

Repeat this

procedure.

•

• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.

Changing the display information

When the power is turned off: The current clock time is displayed if “CLOCK DISP” is set to “CLOCK OFF,”

(see page 14).

When the power is turned on: The display information of the current source changes as follows:

FM/AM

Frequency = Clock = Station name*¹= (back to the beginning)

Audio CD/CD Text: Disc title/performer*²= Track title*²= Current track number with the

elapsed playing time = Current track number with the clock time =

(back to the beginning)

CD/USB

MP3/WMA:

Album name/performer (folder name)*³= Track title (file name)*³=

Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current track

number with the clock time = (back to the beginning)

If no title is assigned to a station, “NO NAME” appears. To assign a title to a station, see page 13.

If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.

If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF” (see page 14),

folder name and file name appear.

OPERATIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Listening to the radio

Select “FM” or “AM.”

Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.

When a station is tuned in, searching stops. To stop searching, press the same

button again.

• You can also search for a station manually—Manual Search. Hold either one of

the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.

• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, the ST

indicator lights up on the display.

Improving the FM reception

Storing stations in memory

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive,

activate monaural mode for better reception.

• See also page 14.

Automatic presetting (FM)—SSM (Strong-

station Sequential Memory)

You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.

While listening to a station...

[Turn] = [Press]

Select the preset number range you want to

store.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.

• The MO indicator lights up on the display.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator

goes off.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically.

• To stop searching, press 4 /¢

To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual presetting (FM/AM)

You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations

for AM.

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset

number “04.”

Selecting preset station

Select preset number “04.”

[Turn] = [Press]

Disc operations

Turn on the power.

Insert a disc.

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change

the source or eject the disc.

Stop playing and ejecting the disc

Selecting a track/folder

• “NO DISC” appears. Press SRC to listen to another

playback source.

Prohibiting disc ejection

[Turn] = [Press]

• For MP3/WMA discs, select the desired folder,

then the desired track by repeating the control dial

procedures.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.

Continued on the next page

OPERATIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you

to...

• To cancel repeat play or random play, select

“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”

[Press]Pause/resume playback.

• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.

Listening to the USB

device

MP3/WMA: Select folder

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB

[Press]Select track

device.

[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the

source or detach the USB device.

Selecting the playback modes

You can use only one of the following playback modes

at a time.

USB input jack

[Turn] = [Press]

REPEAT Ô RANDOM

[Turn] = [Press]

USB memory

REPEAT

TRACK RPT

Repeats current track

FOLDER RPT

MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder

If a USB device has been attached...

RANDOM

FOLDER RND

MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all

tracks of current folder, then

tracks of next folders

Playback starts from where it has been stopped

previously.

• If a different USB device is currently attached,

playback starts from the beginning.

ALL RND

Randomly plays all tracks

10 OPERATIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• This unit may not be able to play the files depending

on the type of USB device.

• Operation and power supply may not work as

intended for some USB devices.

To stop play and detach the USB device

Straightly pull it out from the unit.

• Press SRC to listen to another playback source.

• You cannot connect a computer to the USB input

terminal of the unit.

• Make sure all important data has been backed up to

avoid losing the data.

• Do not leave a USB device in the car, expose to direct

sunlight, or high temperature to avoid deformation

or cause damages to the device.

• Some USB devices may not work immediately after

you turn on the power.

You can operate the USB device in the same way you

operate the files on a disc. (See pages 9 and 10.)

Cautions:

• Avoid using the USB device if it might hinder your

safety driving.

• Do not pull out and attach the USB device repeatedly

while “READING” is shown on the display.

• Do not start the car engine if a USB device is

connected.

• For more details about USB operations, see page 18.

Listening to the other external components

You can connect an external component to AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.

Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting, see page 16.

Select “AUX IN.”

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

Adjust the volume.

—

Adjust the sound as you want (see pages 12 and 13).

—

Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack

Portable audio player, etc.

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

(not supplied)

OPERATIONS & EXTERNAL DEVICES 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting a preset sound mode

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.

• See also page 14.

Selecting from Menu.

[Turn] = [Press]

• See below and page 13 for “USER” settings.

Preset value setting for each sound mode

Preset value

Sound

BASS

MIDDLE

Freq. Level

TREBLE

LOUD

mode

(loudness)

Freq. Level

USER

ROCK

CLASSIC

POPS

HIP HOP

JAZZ

60 Hz

100 Hz

80 Hz

100 Hz

60 Hz

00 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

+03 Q1.0 1.0 kHz

+01 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

+02 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

+04 Q1.0 1.0 kHz

+03 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

00 Q1.0 10.0 kHz

00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz

+01 Q1.25 10.0 kHz

–02 Q1.0 10.0 kHz

00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz

+02

+03

+02

+01

+03

—

OFF

80 Hz

Freq.: Frequency Q: Q-slope

Storing your own sound mode

You can store your own adjustments in memory.

While “USER” is shown on the display...

Select “USER” for “EQ.”

[Turn] = [Press]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select a tone.

Title assignment

You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and

[Turn] = [Press]

AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.

Select “FM” or “AM.”

Show the title entry screen.

Adjust the sound elements of the selected

tone.

[Turn] = [Press]

Adjust the frequency.

Adjust the level.

Adjust the Q-slope.

Assign a title.

Select a character.

Range/selectable items

BASS MIDDLE TREBLE

Sound

elements

Frequency

60 Hz

80 Hz

0.5 kHz 10.0 kHz

1.0 kHz 12.5 kHz

100 Hz 1.5 kHz 15.0 kHz

200 Hz 2.5 kHz 17.5 kHz

Move to the next (or previous) character

position.

Level

–06 to –06 to –06 to

+06

Q1.0

Q1.25

Q1.5

Q2.0

Q0.75

Q1.0

Q1.25

Fixed

Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish

entering the title.

Finish the procedure.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other sound

characteristics.

The adjustment made will be stored automatically.

To erase the entire title

In step 2 above...

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And}S_DE_oT_wT_nI_loN_aG_d.S 13

Menu operations

Call up the menu.

Select the desired item.

[Turn] = [Press]

Repeat step 2 if necessary.

• To return to the previous menu,

press BACK.

• To exit from the menu, press

DISP or MENU.

Initial: Underlined

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DEMO

Display

demonstration

CLOCK DISP*¹

• DEMO ON

Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [7].

Cancels.

• DEMO OFF

• CLOCK ON

Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the

power is turned off.

Clock display

• CLOCK OFF

Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about

5 seconds when the power is turned off, [7].

CLOCK SET

Clock setting

Adjust the hour, then the minute, [7].

(Initial: 1:00)

Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.

Equalizer

USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ

DIMMER

Dimmer

• DIMMER ON

• DIMMER OFF

Dims the display and button illumination.

Cancels.

SCROLL*²

Scroll

• SCROLL ONCE

• SCROLL AUTO

• SCROLL OFF

Scrolls the displayed information once.

Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).

Cancels.

Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the

setting.

TAG DISPLAY

• TAG ON

Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA

Tag display

tracks.

• TAG OFF

Cancels.

MONO*³

Monaural mode

• MONO ON

Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but

stereo effect will be lost, [8].

• MONO OFF

Restore the stereo effect.

If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select

“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Displayed only when the source is “FM.”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

IF BAND

Intermediate

frequency band

• AUTO

Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises

between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)

Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but

sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect

will remain.

• WIDE

FADER*^4,*⁵

Fader

BALANCE*⁵

Balance

R06 – F06

L06 – R06

Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.

(Initial: 00)

Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.

(Initial: 00)

LOUD

Loudness

• LOUD OFF

• LOUD ON

Cancels.

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced

sound at a low volume level.

VOL ADJUST

Volume adjust

VOL ADJ –05 —

VOL ADJ +05

(Initial: VOL

ADJ 00)

Preset the volume adjustment level of each source (except

FM), compared to the FM volume level. The volume level

will automatically increase or decrease when you change

the source.

• Before making an adjustment, select the source you

want to adjust.

• “VOL ADJ FIX” appears on the display if “FM” is selected

as the source.

L/O MODE

Line output mode

• SUB.W

• REAR

Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for

connecting a subwoofer (through an external amplifier).

Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for

connecting the speakers (through an external amplifier).

SUB.W FREQ*⁶

Subwoofer cutoff • MID

frequency

• LOW

• HIGH

Frequencies lower than 72 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

Frequencies lower than 111 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

Frequencies lower than 157 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

SUB.W LEVEL*⁶SUB.W 00

Adjust the subwoofer output level.

(Initial: SUB.W 04)

Subwoofer level

— SUB.W 08

BEEP

Key touch tone

• BEEP OFF

• BEEP ON

Deactivates the key touch tone.

Activates the key touch tone.

AMP GAIN*⁷

Amplifier gain

control

• LOW POWER

VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power

of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the

speaker.)

• HIGH POWER

VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50

If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”

This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.

Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”

The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level

set higher than “VOLUME 30.”

Continued on the next page

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And}S_DE_oT_wT_nI_loN_aG_d.S 15

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

AM*⁸

AM station

• AM OFF

• AM ON

Disable “AM” in source selection.

Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].

AUX IN*⁹

Auxiliary input • AUX ON

• AUX OFF

Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.

Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].

Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.

Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.

More about this unit

Basic operations

• When storing a station manually, the previously

preset station is erased when a new station is stored

in the same preset number.

Turning on the power

• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn

on the power. If the source is ready, playback also

starts.

Disc operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply

with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.

Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on

this product may not be recommended.

Turning off the power

• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,

playback will start from where it had been stopped

previously next time you turn on the power.

General

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs

(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA

formats.

• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and

“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to

eject the disc.

• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are

used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or

WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.

• If you change the source while listening to a disc,

playback stops.

Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,

playback will start from where it had been stopped

previously.

• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after

pressing MENU button, the operation will be

canceled.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

• During SSM search...

– All previously stored stations are erased and the

stations are stored anew.

– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest

preset number will be automatically tuned in.

16 S_DE_oT_wT_nIN_loaG_dS_fro&_mR_WEF_wE_wR_.SE_oN_mC_anE_uS_{als.com. All Manuals Search And Download.}

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the

conditions below:

– Bit rate of MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of MP3:

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (for MPEG-1)

16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Bit rate of WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of WMA: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,

Joliet, Windows extension.

• The maximum number of characters for file/folder

names vary depending on the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo: up to 64 characters

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can only play back files of the same type as

those detected first if a disc includes both audio CD

(CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,

unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this

unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the

following reasons:

– Discs are dirty or scratched.

– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens

inside the unit.

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the

“Packet Write” method.

– There are improper recording conditions (missing

data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,

warped, etc.).

– Joliet: up to 32 characters

– Windows extension: up to 64 characters

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,

255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable

bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the

elapsed time display, and do not show the actual

elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes

noticeable after performing the search function.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and

voice format.

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the

reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular

CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck

to the surface.

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an

ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperature or high

humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the

unit.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of

the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums, artists

(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

– WMA files which are not based upon Windows

Media® Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is not

constant.

• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No

other characters can be correctly displayed.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• USB devices equipped with special functions such as

data security functions cannot be used with the unit.

• Do not use a USB device with 2 or more partitions.

• This unit may not recognized a USB device connected

through a USB card reader.

• This unit may not play back files in a USB device

properly when using a USB extension cord.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB device

• While playing from a USB device, the playback order

may differ from other players.

• This unit may be unable to play back some USB

devices or some files due to their characteristics or

recording conditions.

• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and

connection ports, some USB devices may not be

attached properly or the connection might be loose.

• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the unit

at a time. Do not use a USB hub.

• If the connected USB device does not have the correct

files, “CANNOT PLAY” appears.

• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and

voice format.

– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.

Ejecting a disc or removing a USB device

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the

conditions below:

– Bit rate of MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of MP3:

• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,

it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again

to protect it from dust.

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (for MPEG-1)

16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Bit rate of WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of WMA: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

• After ejecting a disc or removing a USB device,

“NO DISC” or “NO USB“ appears and you cannot

operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,

reattach a USB device, or press SRC to select another

playback source.

• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR

(variable bit rate).

• The maximum number of characters for:

– Folder names : 32 characters

– File names : 32 characters

– MP3 Tag : 64 characters

Title assignment

• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station

frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted

titles before assignment.

– WMA Tag : 32 characters

Menu operations

• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files, 255

folders (255 files per folder including folder without

unsupported files), and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit does not support SD card reader.

• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating

is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from

“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while

the volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,”

the unit automatically changes the volume level to

“VOLUME 30.”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

• The unit does not work at all.

• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.

Reset the unit (see page 3).

Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see

page 16).

• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

• “AM” cannot be selected.

Connect the antenna firmly.

Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see

page 16).

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be

skipped.

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which

you used for recording.

• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Check the cords and connections.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.

• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately

on the display.

Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format

compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or

Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the

file names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or

WMA tracks.)

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• A longer readout time is required

Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.

(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).

• Tracks do not play back in the order you

have intended them to play.

The playback order is determined when the files are

recorded.

• The elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by

how the tracks are recorded on the disc.

• “NO FILE” appears on the display.

Selected folder is an empty folder*. Select another folder

that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains

data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.

• The correct characters are not displayed

(e.g. album name).

This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,

and a limited number of symbols.

• Noise is generated.

The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to

another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or

<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

• “READING” keeps flashing on the display. • Readout time varies depending on the USB device.

• Do not use too many hierarchy or folders.

• Turn off the power then on again.

• Reattach the USB device again.

• “NO FILE” appears on the display.

Selected folder is an empty folder*. Select another folder

that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains

data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.

• Tracks/folders are not played back in the

order you have intended.

The playback order is determined by the write-in time

stamp. The first track/folder written into the USB device

will be the first track/folder for playback.

• “CANNOT PLAY” flashes on the display.

• “NO USB” appears on the display.

• Attach a USB device that contains tracks encoded in an

appropriate format.

• The unit cannot detect the USB device.

• Reattach the USB device again.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.

• While playing a track, sound is sometimes The MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into

interrupted.

the USB device.

Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB device, and

try again.

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance

How to clean the connectors

To keep discs clean

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the

connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with

alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with

a soft cloth in a straight line from center

to edge.

• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional

record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean

discs.

Connectors

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough spots

around the inner and outer edges. If

such a disc is used, this unit may reject

the disc.

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in

the following cases:

• After starting the heater in the car.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a

pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this

case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a

few hours until the moisture has evaporated.

Do not use the following discs:

Single CD (8 cm disc)

Warped disc

How to handle discs

When removing a disc from its

case, press down the center holder

of the case and lift the disc out,

holding it by the edges.

Center holder

Sticker and sticker residue

Stick-on label

• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its

recording surface.

When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the

disc around the center holder (with the printed surface

facing up).

C-thru Disc (semi-

transparent disc)

Unusual shape

• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.

Transparent or semi-

transparent parts on its

recording area

REFERENCES 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

Maximum Power Output:

Front/Rear:

50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

at no more than 0.8% total harmonic

distortion.

Load Impedance:

4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Tone Control Range:

Bass:

12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz)

Q1.0, Q1.25, Q1.5, Q2.0

Middle:

Treble:

12 dB (0.5 kHz, 1.0 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 2.5 kHz)

Q0.75, Q1.0, Q1.25

12 dB (10.0 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15.0 kHz,

17.5 kHz)

Q = Fixed

Frequency Response:

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

Output Impedance:

70 dB

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

1 kΩ

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

Other Terminal:

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

USB input jack, AUX (auxiliary) input jack

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

65 dB

AM:

FM Tuner

Usable Sensitivity:

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):

Frequency Response:

Stereo Separation:

Sensitivity:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

30 dB

AM Tuner

20 μV

Selectivity:

35 dB

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD PLAYER SECTION

Type:

Compact disc player

Signal Detection System:

Non-contact optical pickup

(semiconductor laser)

Number of Channels:

2 channels (stereo)

5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

96 dB

Frequency Response:

Dynamic Range:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

98 dB

Wow and Flutter:

Less than measurable limit

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)

WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:

USB SECTION

USB Standard:

USB 1.1, USB 2.0

Max. 12 Mbps

Mass storage class

FAT 32/16/12

Data Transfer Rate (Full Speed):

Compatible Device:

Compatible File System:

Playable Audio Format:

Max. Current:

MP3/WMA

DC 5 V 500 mA

GENERAL

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Negative ground

Grounding System:

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:

182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm

188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm

1.3 kg (excluding accessories)

Panel Size:

Mass:

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

REFERENCES 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

1008DTSMDTJEIN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KD-R504

Installation/Connection Manual

1008DTSMDTJEIN

GET0585-002A

[UI]

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does

not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information

regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

WARNINGS

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all

electrical connections before installing the unit.

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.

Notes:

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car

audio dealer.

• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the

rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,

change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 15 of the

INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

Heat sink

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit

will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring

in your car.

Do the required electrical connections.

Bend the appropriate tabs to

hold the sleeve firmly in place.

Parts list for installation and connection

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio

dealer immediately.

Removing the unit

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

A / B

Hard case/Control

panel

Sleeve

Trim plate

Power cord

Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm;

M5 × 12.5 mm)

Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated

so that the unit can be removed.

Washer (ø5)

Lock nut (M5)

When using the optional stay

When installing the unit

without using the sleeve

Rubber

cushion

Handles

Remote controller

Battery

Stay (option)

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the

car radio and install the unit in its place.

Fire wall

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

TROUBLESHOOTING

• The fuse blows.

Dashboard

Bracket*²

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

Screw (option)

• Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

Pocket

• No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

Flat head screws

(M5 × 8 mm)*²

• Sound is distorted.

Bracket*²

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

Note : When installing the unit on the

mounting bracket, make sure to

use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer

screws are used, they could damage

the unit.

• Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

Install the unit at an

angle of less than 30˚.

• This unit becomes hot.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

Not supplied for this unit.

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Typical connections

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

Rear ground terminal

Rear line out (see diagram

)

15 A fuse

Antenna terminal

Ignition switch

Black

To the metallic body or chassis of the car

Yellow*²

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery

(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

Red

Fuse block

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

Blue

To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)

Blue with white stripe

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)

White with black stripe

White

Gray with black stripe

Gray

Green with black stripe

Green

Purple with black stripe

Purple

Left speaker (front)

Right speaker (front)

Left speaker (rear)

Right speaker (rear)

Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.

Y-connector*¹

Remote lead

Remote lead (blue with white stripe)

Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 15 of the

INSTRUCTIONS.)

To the remote lead of other equipment or

automatic antenna if any

JVC Amplifier

Rear speakers

Signal cord*¹

Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W” (See page 15 of the

INSTRUCTIONS.)

Front speakers

Remote lead

Subwoofer

JVC Amplifier

Not supplied for this unit.

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot be turned on.

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KD-R506/KD-R505/

KD-RC502/KD-RC501

CD RECEIVER

KD-R506/KD-R505/

KD-RC502/KD-RC501

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS

GET0584-001B

[U/UH]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best

possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical

instruments.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will

block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any complicated

operations.

[European Union only]

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold

weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes

normal before operating the unit.

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to

look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic

accident.

This mark is used to indicate...

Caution on volume setting:

Turn the control dial to make a

Digital devices (CD/USB) produce very little noise

selection, then press to confirm the

compared with other sources. Lower the volume before

selection.

playing these digital sources to avoid damaging the

speakers by sudden increase of the output level.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Detaching the control panel

CONTENTS

Detaching the control panel.........................

Attaching the control panel .........................

How to reset your unit .................................

How to forcibly eject a disc...........................

OPERATIONS

Basic operations...........................................

• Using the control panel...............................

• Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)......

Preparation..................................................

Listening to the radio...................................

Disc operations.............................................

Attaching the control panel

How to reset your unit

Listening to the USB device.......................... 10

EXTERNAL DEVICES

Listening to the other external

components.............................................. 11

SETTINGS

Selecting a preset sound mode .................... 12

Title assignment .......................................... 13

Menu operations.......................................... 14

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

REFERENCES

More about this unit .................................... 16

Troubleshooting........................................... 19

Maintenance................................................ 21

Specifications............................................... 22

How to forcibly eject a disc

• You can forcibly eject the loaded disc even if the disc is

locked. To lock/unlock the disc, see page 9.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Basic operations

Using the control panel

• FM/AM: Select preset station.

• CD/USB: Select folder.

• Turn on the power.

• Attenuate the sound (if the power is on).

• Turn off the power [Hold].

Select the source.

FM = AM*²= CD*³= USB = AUX IN*²=

(back to the beginning)

Detach the panel.

Change the display information.

• FM/AM: Search for station.

• CD/USB: Select track.

Return to the previous menu.

Remote sensor

AUX (auxiliary) input jack

USB (Universal Serial Bus) input jack

• Enter list operations.

• Enter Menu setting [Hold].

• Control the volume*⁴or select items [Turn].

• Confirm the selection [Press].

• FM: Enter SSM preset mode [Hold].

• CD/USB: Enter playback mode [Hold].

Pause/resume playback*⁴[Press].

Loading slot

Display window

Eject disc.

Select the sound mode.

Also known as “Control dial” in this manual.

You cannot select these sources if they were disabled

in the Menu (see “SRC SELECT” in “Menu

operations” on page 16).

You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if no

disc is in the unit.

You can still adjust the volume during pause when

the selected source is CD/USB.

Before resume playback, check to be sure that you

have not raise the volume level too much.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display window

Tr (track) indicator

Source display / Track number / Folder number /

Time countdown indicator

DISC indicator

Sound mode indicators—CLASSIC, HIP HOP, JAZZ,

ROCK, POPS, USER

EQ (equalizer) indicator

LOUD (loudness) indicator

Disc information indicators—

TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)

Main display

Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),

MO (monaural)

Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),

(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Searc}O_hP_AnE_dR_DA_oT_wIO_nloN_aS_d.

Using the remote controller (RM-RK50)

Installing the lithium coin battery (CR2025)

Caution:

• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

• Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire, or the like.

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is on.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

• Changes the preset stations.

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA.

Adjusts the volume level.

Selects the sound mode.

Selects the source.

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and

held.

If the effectiveness of the remote controller

decreases, replace the battery.

Before using the remote controller:

• Aim the remote controller directly at the remote

sensor on the unit.

• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to bright light

(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

Warning (to prevent accidents and damage):

• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its

equivalent.

• Do not leave the remote controller in a place (such

as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight for a long

time.

Remote sensor

• Store the battery in a place where children cannot

reach.

• Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery,

or dispose of it in a fire.

• Do not leave the battery with other metallic

materials.

• Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar

tools.

• Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when

throwing away or saving it.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Preparation

Canceling the display demonstration and setting the clock

• See also page 14.

Turn on the power.

Cancel the display demonstrations

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”

Set the clock

Press and hold until

the main menu is

Select “CLOCK” = “CLOCK SET.”

called up.

Adjust the hour, then press control dial once to proceed to adjust

the minute.

[Turn] = [Press]

Repeat this

procedure.

•

• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.

Changing the display information

When the power is turned off: The current clock time is displayed if “CLOCK DISP” is set to “CLOCK OFF,”

(see page 14).

When the power is turned on: The display information of the current source changes as follows:

FM/AM

Frequency = Clock = Station name*¹= (back to the beginning)

Audio CD/CD Text: Disc title/performer*²= Track title*²= Current track number with the

elapsed playing time = Current track number with the clock time =

(back to the beginning)

CD/USB

MP3/WMA:

Album name/performer (folder name)*³= Track title (file name)*³=

Current track number with the elapsed playing time = Current track

number with the clock time = (back to the beginning)

If no title is assigned to a station, “NO NAME” appears. To assign a title to a station, see page 13.

If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.

If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information or “TAG DISPLAY” is set to “TAG OFF” (see page 14),

folder name and file name appear.

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Searc}O_hP_AnE_dR_DA_oT_wIO_nloN_aS_d.

Listening to the radio

Select “FM” or “AM.”

Search for a station to listen—Auto Search.

When a station is tuned in, searching stops. To stop searching, press the same

button again.

• You can also search for a station manually—Manual Search. Hold either one of

the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.

• When receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength, the ST

indicator lights up on the display.

Improving the FM reception

Storing stations in memory

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive,

activate monaural mode for better reception.

• See also page 14.

Automatic presetting (FM)—SSM (Strong-

station Sequential Memory)

You can preset up to 18 stations for FM.

While listening to a station...

[Turn] = [Press]

Select the preset number range you want to

store.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.

• The MO indicator lights up on the display.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure to select “MONO OFF.” The MO indicator

goes off.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically.

• To stop searching, press 4 /¢

To preset other 6 stations, repeat from step 1 again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual presetting (FM/AM)

You can preset up to 18 stations for FM and 6 stations

for AM.

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.50 MHz into preset

number “04.”

Selecting preset station

Select preset number “04.”

[Turn] = [Press]

Disc operations

Turn on the power.

Insert a disc.

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change

the source or eject the disc.

Stop playing and ejecting the disc

Selecting a track/folder

• “NO DISC” appears. Press SRC to listen to another

playback source.

Prohibiting disc ejection

[Turn] = [Press]

• For MP3/WMA discs, select the desired folder,

then the desired track by repeating the control dial

procedures.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.

Continued on the next page

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Searc}O_hP_AnE_dR_DA_oT_wIO_nloN_aS_d.

Pressing (or holding) the following buttons allows you

to...

• To cancel repeat play or random play, select

“RPT OFF” or “RND OFF.”

[Press]Pause/resume playback.

• To return to the previous menu, press BACK.

Listening to the USB

device

MP3/WMA: Select folder

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB

[Press]Select track

device.

[Hold] Reverse/fast-forward track

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the

source or detach the USB device.

Selecting the playback modes

You can use only one of the following playback modes

at a time.

USB input jack

[Turn] = [Press]

REPEAT Ô RANDOM

[Turn] = [Press]

USB memory

REPEAT

TRACK RPT

Repeats current track

FOLDER RPT

MP3/WMA: Repeats current folder

If a USB device has been attached...

RANDOM

FOLDER RND

MP3/WMA: Randomly plays all

tracks of current folder, then

tracks of next folders

Playback starts from where it has been stopped

previously.

• If a different USB device is currently attached,

playback starts from the beginning.

ALL RND

Randomly plays all tracks

10 OPERATIONS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• This unit may not be able to play the files depending

on the type of USB device.

• Operation and power supply may not work as

intended for some USB devices.

To stop play and detach the USB device

Straightly pull it out from the unit.

• Press SRC to listen to another playback source.

• You cannot connect a computer to the USB input

terminal of the unit.

• Make sure all important data has been backed up to

avoid losing the data.

• Do not leave a USB device in the car, expose to direct

sunlight, or high temperature to avoid deformation

or cause damages to the device.

• Some USB devices may not work immediately after

you turn on the power.

You can operate the USB device in the same way you

operate the files on a disc. (See pages 9 and 10.)

Cautions:

• Avoid using the USB device if it might hinder your

safety driving.

• Do not pull out and attach the USB device repeatedly

while “READING” is shown on the display.

• Do not start the car engine if a USB device is

connected.

• For more details about USB operations, see page 18.

Listening to the other external components

You can connect an external component to AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.

Preparation: Make sure “AUX ON” is selected in the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting, see page 16.

Select “AUX IN.”

Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

Adjust the volume.

—

Adjust the sound as you want (see pages 12 and 13).

—

Connecting an external component to the AUX input jack

Portable audio player, etc.

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

(not supplied)

OPERATIONS & EXTERNAL DEVICES 11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting a preset sound mode

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.

• See also page 14.

Selecting from Menu.

[Turn] = [Press]

• See below and page 13 for “USER” settings.

Preset value setting for each sound mode

Preset value

Sound

BASS

MIDDLE

Freq. Level

TREBLE

LOUD

mode

(loudness)

Freq. Level

USER

ROCK

CLASSIC

POPS

HIP HOP

JAZZ

60 Hz

100 Hz

80 Hz

100 Hz

60 Hz

00 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

+03 Q1.0 1.0 kHz

+01 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

+02 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

+04 Q1.0 1.0 kHz

+03 Q1.25 1.0 kHz

00 Q1.0 10.0 kHz

00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz

+01 Q1.25 10.0 kHz

–02 Q1.0 10.0 kHz

00 Q1.25 10.0 kHz

+02

+03

+02

+01

+03

—

OFF

80 Hz

Freq.: Frequency Q: Q-slope

Storing your own sound mode

You can store your own adjustments in memory.

While “USER” is shown on the display...

Select “USER” for “EQ.”

[Turn] = [Press]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select a tone.

Title assignment

You can assign titles to 30 station frequencies (FM and

[Turn] = [Press]

AM) using 8 characters (maximum) for each title.

Select “FM” or “AM.”

Show the title entry screen.

Adjust the sound elements of the selected

tone.

[Turn] = [Press]

Adjust the frequency.

Adjust the level.

Adjust the Q-slope.

Assign a title.

Select a character.

Range/selectable items

BASS MIDDLE TREBLE

Sound

elements

Frequency

60 Hz

80 Hz

0.5 kHz 10.0 kHz

1.0 kHz 12.5 kHz

100 Hz 1.5 kHz 15.0 kHz

200 Hz 2.5 kHz 17.5 kHz

Move to the next (or previous) character

position.

Level

–06 to –06 to –06 to

+06

Q1.0

Q1.25

Q1.5

Q2.0

Q0.75

Q1.0

Q1.25

Fixed

Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish

entering the title.

Finish the procedure.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust other sound

characteristics.

The adjustment made will be stored automatically.

To erase the entire title

In step 2 above...

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And}S_DE_oT_wT_nI_lN_oaG_d.S 13

Menu operations

Call up the menu.

Select the desired item.

[Turn] = [Press]

Repeat step 2 if necessary.

• To return to the previous menu,

press BACK.

• To exit from the menu, press

DISP or MENU.

Initial: Underlined

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DEMO

Display

demonstration

CLOCK DISP*¹

• DEMO ON

Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [7].

Cancels.

• DEMO OFF

• CLOCK ON

Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the

power is turned off.

Clock display

• CLOCK OFF

Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about

5 seconds when the power is turned off, [7].

CLOCK SET

Clock setting

Adjust the hour, then the minute, [7].

(Initial: 1:00)

Select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre.

Equalizer

USER, ROCK, CLASSIC, POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ

DIMMER

Dimmer

• DIMMER ON

• DIMMER OFF

Dims the display and button illumination.

Cancels.

SCROLL*²

Scroll

• SCROLL ONCE

• SCROLL AUTO

• SCROLL OFF

Scrolls the displayed information once.

Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).

Cancels.

Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the

setting.

TAG DISPLAY

• TAG ON

Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA

Tag display

tracks.

• TAG OFF

Cancels.

MONO*³

Monaural mode

• MONO ON

Activate monaural mode to improve FM reception, but

stereo effect will be lost, [8].

• MONO OFF

Restore the stereo effect.

If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select

“CLOCK OFF” to save the car’s battery.

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Displayed only when the source is “FM.”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

IF BAND

Intermediate

frequency band

• AUTO

Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises

between adjacent stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)

Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but

sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect

will remain.

• WIDE

FADER*^4,*⁵

Fader

BALANCE*⁵

Balance

R06 – F06

L06 – R06

Adjust the front and rear speaker output balance.

(Initial: 00)

Adjust the left and right speaker output balance.

(Initial: 00)

LOUD

Loudness

• LOUD OFF

• LOUD ON

Cancels.

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced

sound at a low volume level.

VOL ADJUST

Volume adjust

VOL ADJ –05 —

VOL ADJ +05

(Initial: VOL

ADJ 00)

Preset the volume adjustment level of each source (except

FM), compared to the FM volume level. The volume level

will automatically increase or decrease when you change

the source.

• Before making an adjustment, select the source you

want to adjust.

• “VOL ADJ FIX” appears on the display if “FM” is selected

as the source.

L/O MODE

Line output mode

• SUB.W

• REAR

Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for

connecting a subwoofer (through an external amplifier).

Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for

connecting the speakers (through an external amplifier).

SUB.W FREQ*⁶

Subwoofer cutoff • MID

frequency

• LOW

• HIGH

Frequencies lower than 72 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

Frequencies lower than 111 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

Frequencies lower than 157 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

SUB.W LEVEL*⁶SUB.W 00

Adjust the subwoofer output level.

(Initial: SUB.W 04)

Subwoofer level

— SUB.W 08

BEEP

Key touch tone

• BEEP OFF

• BEEP ON

Deactivates the key touch tone.

Activates the key touch tone.

AMP GAIN*⁷

Amplifier gain

control

• LOW POWER

VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 30 (Select if the maximum power

of each speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the

speaker.)

• HIGH POWER

VOLUME 00 – VOLUME 50

If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”

This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.

Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “SUB.W.”

The volume level automatically changes to “VOLUME 30” if you change to “LOW POWER” with the volume level

set higher than “VOLUME 30.”

Continued on the next page

_{Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And}S_DE_oT_wT_nI_lN_oaG_d.S 15

Category Menu items

Selectable settings, [reference page]

AM*⁸

AM station

• AM OFF

• AM ON

Disable “AM” in source selection.

Enable “AM” in source selection, [4].

AUX IN*⁹

Auxiliary input • AUX ON

• AUX OFF

Disable “AUX IN” in source selection.

Enable “AUX IN” in source selection, [4].

Displayed only when any source other than “AM” is selected.

Displayed only when any source other than “AUX IN” is selected.

More about this unit

Basic operations

• When storing a station manually, the previously

preset station is erased when a new station is stored

in the same preset number.

Turning on the power

• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can also turn

on the power. If the source is ready, playback also

starts.

Disc operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply

with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.

Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on

this product may not be recommended.

Turning off the power

• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,

playback will start from where it had been stopped

previously next time you turn on the power.

General

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs

(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3/WMA

formats.

• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and

“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to

eject the disc.

• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are

used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or

WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.

• If you change the source while listening to a disc,

playback stops.

Next time you select “CD” as the playback source,

playback will start from where it had been stopped

previously.

• If no operation is done for about 30 seconds after

pressing MENU button, the operation will be

canceled.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

• During SSM search...

– All previously stored stations are erased and the

stations are stored anew.

– When SSM is over, the station stored in the lowest

preset number will be automatically tuned in.

16 S_DET_owT_nIN_loG_adS_fr&_omR_WEF_wE_wR_.SE_oN_mC_aE_nuS_{als.com. All Manuals Search And Download.}

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the

conditions below:

– Bit rate of MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of MP3:

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (for MPEG-1)

16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Bit rate of WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of WMA: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,

Joliet, Windows extension.

• The maximum number of characters for file/folder

names vary depending on the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo: up to 64 characters

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can only play back files of the same type as

those detected first if a disc includes both audio CD

(CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,

unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this

unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the

following reasons:

– Discs are dirty or scratched.

– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens

inside the unit.

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the

“Packet Write” method.

– There are improper recording conditions (missing

data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,

warped, etc.).

– Joliet: up to 32 characters

– Windows extension: up to 64 characters

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,

255 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable

bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the

elapsed time display, and do not show the actual

elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes

noticeable after performing the search function.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and

voice format.

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the

reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular

CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck

to the surface.

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an

ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperature or high

humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the

unit.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of

the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums, artists

(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

– WMA files which are not based upon Windows

Media® Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is not

constant.

• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No

other characters can be correctly displayed.

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES 17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• USB devices equipped with special functions such as

data security functions cannot be used with the unit.

• Do not use a USB device with 2 or more partitions.

• This unit may not recognized a USB device connected

through a USB card reader.

• This unit may not play back files in a USB device

properly when using a USB extension cord.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB device

• While playing from a USB device, the playback order

may differ from other players.

• This unit may be unable to play back some USB

devices or some files due to their characteristics or

recording conditions.

• Depending on the shape of the USB devices and

connection ports, some USB devices may not be

attached properly or the connection might be loose.

• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the unit

at a time. Do not use a USB hub.

• If the connected USB device does not have the correct

files, “CANNOT PLAY” appears.

• This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and

voice format.

– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.

Ejecting a disc or removing a USB device

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the

conditions below:

– Bit rate of MP3: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of MP3:

• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,

it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again

to protect it from dust.

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (for MPEG-1)

16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Bit rate of WMA: 32 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency of WMA: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

• After ejecting a disc or removing a USB device,

“NO DISC” or “NO USB“ appears and you cannot

operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,

reattach a USB device, or press SRC to select another

playback source.

• This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR

(variable bit rate).

• The maximum number of characters for:

– Folder names : 32 characters

– File names : 32 characters

– MP3 Tag : 64 characters

Title assignment

• If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station

frequencies, “NAME FULL” appears. Delete unwanted

titles before assignment.

– WMA Tag : 32 characters

Menu operations

• This unit can recognize a total of 5 000 files, 255

folders (255 files per folder including folder without

unsupported files), and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit does not support SD card reader.

• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating

is other than 5 V and exceeds 500 mA.

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from

“HIGH POWER” to “LOW POWER” while

the volume level is set higher than “VOLUME 30,”

the unit automatically changes the volume level to

“VOLUME 30.”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

• The unit does not work at all.

• “AUX IN” cannot be selected.

Reset the unit (see page 3).

Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AUX IN” setting (see

page 16).

• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.

• Static noise while listening to the radio.

• “AM” cannot be selected.

Connect the antenna firmly.

Check the “SRC SELECT” = “AM” setting (see

page 16).

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be

skipped.

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which

you used for recording.

• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Check the cords and connections.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.

• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately

on the display.

Press 0, then insert a disc correctly.

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format

compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or

Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the

file names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the

extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or

WMA tracks.)

Continued on the next page

REFERENCES 19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• A longer readout time is required

Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.

(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).

• Tracks do not play back in the order you

have intended them to play.

The playback order is determined when the files are

recorded.

• The elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by

how the tracks are recorded on the disc.

• “NO FILE” appears on the display.

Selected folder is an empty folder*. Select another folder

that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains

data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.

• The correct characters are not displayed

(e.g. album name).

This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,

and a limited number of symbols.

• Noise is generated.

The track played back is not an MP3/WMA track. Skip to

another file. (Do not add the extension code <.mp3> or

<.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

• “READING” keeps flashing on the display. • Readout time varies depending on the USB device.

• Do not use too many hierarchy or folders.

• Turn off the power then on again.

• Reattach the USB device again.

• “NO FILE” appears on the display.

Selected folder is an empty folder*. Select another folder

that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

* Folder that is physically empty or folder that contains

data but does not contain valid MP3/WMA track.

• Tracks/folders are not played back in the

order you have intended.

The playback order is determined by the write-in time

stamp. The first track/folder written into the USB device

will be the first track/folder for playback.

• “CANNOT PLAY” flashes on the display.

• “NO USB” appears on the display.

• Attach a USB device that contains tracks encoded in an

appropriate format.

• The unit cannot detect the USB device.

• Reattach the USB device again.

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.

album name).

This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.

• While playing a track, sound is sometimes The MP3/WMA tracks have not been properly copied into

interrupted.

the USB device.

Copy MP3/WMA tracks again into the USB device, and

try again.

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance

How to clean the connectors

To keep discs clean

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the

connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with

alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with

a soft cloth in a straight line from center

to edge.

• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional

record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean

discs.

Connectors

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough spots

around the inner and outer edges. If

such a disc is used, this unit may reject

the disc.

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in

the following cases:

• After starting the heater in the car.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a

pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this

case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a

few hours until the moisture has evaporated.

Do not use the following discs:

Single CD (8 cm disc)

Warped disc

How to handle discs

When removing a disc from its

case, press down the center holder

of the case and lift the disc out,

holding it by the edges.

Center holder

Sticker and sticker residue

Stick-on label

• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its

recording surface.

When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the

disc around the center holder (with the printed surface

facing up).

C-thru Disc (semi-

transparent disc)

Unusual shape

• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.

Transparent or semi-

transparent parts on its

recording area

REFERENCES 21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

Maximum Power Output:

Front/Rear:

50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

at no more than 0.8% total harmonic

distortion.

Load Impedance:

4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Tone Control Range:

Bass:

12 dB (60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz)

Q1.0, Q1.25, Q1.5, Q2.0

Middle:

Treble:

12 dB (0.5 kHz, 1.0 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 2.5 kHz)

Q0.75, Q1.0, Q1.25

12 dB (10.0 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15.0 kHz,

17.5 kHz)

Q = Fixed

Frequency Response:

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

Output Impedance:

70 dB

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

1 kΩ

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

Other Terminal:

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

USB input jack, AUX (auxiliary) input jack

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

65 dB

AM:

FM Tuner

Usable Sensitivity:

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz):

Frequency Response:

Stereo Separation:

Sensitivity:

40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

30 dB

AM Tuner

20 μV

Selectivity:

35 dB

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD PLAYER SECTION

Type:

Compact disc player

Signal Detection System:

Non-contact optical pickup

(semiconductor laser)

Number of Channels:

2 channels (stereo)

5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

96 dB

Frequency Response:

Dynamic Range:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

98 dB

Wow and Flutter:

Less than measurable limit

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)

WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:

USB SECTION

USB Standard:

USB 1.1, USB 2.0

Max. 12 Mbps

Mass storage class

FAT 32/16/12

Data Transfer Rate (Full Speed):

Compatible Device:

Compatible File System:

Playable Audio Format:

Max. Current:

MP3/WMA

DC 5 V 500 mA

GENERAL

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Negative ground

Grounding System:

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.) Installation Size:

182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm

188 mm × 58 mm × 6 mm

1.3 kg (excluding accessories)

Panel Size:

Mass:

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

REFERENCES 23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

EN, TH

0509DTSMDTJEIN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KD-R506/KD-R505/KD-RC502/KD-RC501

Installation/Connection Manual

°“√µ¥µß/§¡Õ°“√µ¥µß

0409DTSMDTJEIN

EN, TH

GET0584-006B

[U/UH]

‰∑¬

ENGLISH

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does

not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

™

¥ª√–°Õ∫‰¥π√∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æÕ„™ß“π°∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øø“ “¬¥π¢«≈∫°√–· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑ À“°√∂¬πµ¢Õß§ÿ ≥‰¡

¥„™√–∫∫π µÕß„™‡§√Õß·ª≈ß°√–· ‰ø™«¬ ´ß “¡“√∂À“´Õ‰¥®“°√“π¢“¬‡§√Õß‡ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC

§”‡µÕπ

WARNINGS

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all

electrical connections before installing the unit.

‡æÕªÕß°π°“√‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√¢Õ·π–π”„Àª≈¥¢«·∫µ‡µÕ√≈∫ÕÕ°·≈«®ßµÕ “¬‰ø°Õπµ¥µß‡§√Õß

• µ√«® Õ∫„À·π„®«“‰¥‡¥π “¬¥πµÕ√–À«“ß‡§√Õß°∫µ«∂ß √∂¬πµ„À¡·≈«À≈ß®“°µ¥µß

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.

À¡“¬‡Àµ

Notes:

• „™æ°¥®”‡æ“–·∑πø« À“°ø« ¢“¥∫Õ¬ „Àª√°…“√“ π¢“¬‡§√Õß‡ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio

dealer.

• It is recommended to connect speakers with a maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and

at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP

GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short circuits, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

• ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀµÕ≈”‚æß ∑¡°”≈ß¢∫ ß

¥π‡°«“ 50 W (∑ß¥“πÀπ“·≈–¥“πÀ≈ß ¡§“§«“¡µ“π∑“π 4 Ω ∂ß 8 Ω)

∂“°”≈ß¢∫µ”°«“ 50 W „À‡ª≈¬π§“ “AMP GAIN” ‡æÕªÕß°π‰¡„À≈”‚æß™”√ (¥¥Àπ“ 15 §”·π–π”)

• °“√ªÕß°π°“√≈¥«ß®√ ®–µÕßæπ¢« “¬µ–°« ∑ Ë‰¡·„™≈«¥«¬‡∑ ªæπ “¬‰ø

• ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ®–√Õπ¡“°À≈ß®“°„™ √–¡¥√–«ßÕ¬“‰ª ¡º ‡¡Õ∂Õ¥™ ¥ª√–°Õ∫π

Heat sink / ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ

Parts list for installation and connection

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer

immediately.

√“¬°“√ «πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√∫µ¥µß·≈–‡™Õ¡µÕ°π

«πª√–°Õ∫µÕ‰ªπ„À¡“°∫™

¥ª√–°Õ∫Àπ“°¡ ß„¥‰¡§√∫ °√

≥“°ª…√“µ«·∑π®”Àπ“¬‡§√Õß‡ ¬ßµ¥√∂¬πµ JVC ‚¥¬∑π∑

A / B

Hard case/Control panel

Sleeve

Trim plate

≈ß∫√√®/Àπ“ª¥

ª≈Õ°À

·ºπ‚≈À–¢Õ∫·µß

Power cord

“¬‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß

Handles

§π∫ß§∫

Remote controller

√‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈

Battery

·∫µ‡µÕ√

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information

regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

°“√µ¥µß (°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡‡¢“)

¿“æµ«Õ¬“ßµÕ‰ªπ· ¥ß∂ß°“√µ¥µß·∫∫∑«‰ª À“°§

¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC ¢Õß∑“πÀ√Õ∫√…

• ™ ¥ª√–°Õ∫“§∂ ≥·‰¡π„®«“µ¥µß™ ¥ª√–°Õ∫∂π°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡ „ÀÀ“™“ßº‡™¬«™“≠‡ªπºµ¥µß

≥ª¡≠À“À√ÕµÕß°“√¢Õ¡≈‡°¬«°∫™ÿ ¥µß °√ÿ ≥“°ª…√“°∫º¢“¬‡§√Õß‡

Do the required electrical connections.

µÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑°”Àπ¥‰«∑ßÀ¡¥

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

ßÕ·ºπ‡æÕ¬¥ª≈Õ°„ÀµÕ°π‡¢“∑

Removing the unit

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

°“√∂Õ¥™

¥ª√–°Õ∫

°Õπ®–∂Õ¥™

¥ª√–°Õ∫ ª„À≈¥Àπ“µ¥ «π∑“¬°Õπ

Insert the two handles, then pull them as

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

„ §π∫ß§∫2 Õπ≈ß„π√Õß ”À√∫„™æπ≈«¥¥ß¿“æ®“°ππ

„À‡≈Õπ™

¥ª√–°Õ∫ÕÕ°„π¢≥–§∑Õ¬Ê¥ß§π∫ß§∫∑ß Õß

ÕπÕÕ°®“°°π

When using the optional stay / ‡¡Õ„™µ«¬¥·∫∫‡≈Õ°‰¥

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ‡¡Õµ¥µß™

¥ª√–°Õ∫‚¥¬„‰™¡ª≈Õ°À

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

µ«Õ¬“ß‡™π „π√∂¬πµ‚µ‚¬µ“ „À∂Õ¥«∑¬ ¥√µ∂¬πµÕÕ°°Õπ ·≈«®ßµ¥µß‡§√Õßπ‡¢“·∑π∑

Stay *⁶

µ«¬¥*⁶

Fire wall

ºπß°π‰ø

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*⁶

°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*⁶

Dashboard

·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡

Bracket *⁶

·∑π√Õß√∫*⁶

Screw*⁶

°√*⁶

Flat head screws (M5 × 8 mm)*⁶

°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*⁶

Pocket

°–‡ª“–

Bracket*⁶

·∑π√Õß√∫*⁶

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.

Note

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are

used, they could damage the unit.

µ¥µß™

¥ª√–°Õ∫¡∑ ¡”°µ«“ 30˚ Õß»“

À¡“¬‡Àµ

‡¡Õµ¥µß™ ¥ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·π∑√Õß√∫‰« „À„™ °√¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂“„™ °√¬“«°«“πÕ“®∑”„À™ÿ ¥ª√–°Õ∫¬‡À“¬‰¥

When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

Rubber cushion—Not supplied for this unit.

Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 12.5 mm)—Not supplied for this unit.

Washer (ø5)—Not supplied for this unit.

Lock nut (M5)—Not supplied for this unit.

Not supplied for this unit.

*¹‡¡Õ§

ÿ ≥ß™µÿ ¥ª√–°Õ∫π¢√–«ßÕ¬“∑”„Àø« ∫√‡«≥ «π∑“¬‡ ¬À“¬

*²¬“ß°π°√–·∑°—‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

¥ª√–°Õ∫π

≈°µ¥ (M4 × 5 ¡¡.; M5 × 12.5 ¡¡.)—‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ ¥ª√–°Õ∫π

ª√–‡°π«ß·À«π (ø5)—‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

¥ª√–°Õ∫π

*⁵πÕµ≈Õ§ (M5)—‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

¥ª√–°Õ∫π

*⁶‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

¥ª√–°Õ∫π

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENGLISH

‰∑¬

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

°“√‡™Õ¡‚¥¬„™‰øø“

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit

will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in

¢Õ§«√√–«ß ”À√∫°“√µÕ·À≈ß®“¬°”≈ß·≈–≈”‚æß:

•

• °Õπ∑®–µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß¢Õß≈”‚æß‡¢“°∫≈”‚æß „Àµ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õß§

your car.

Typical connections / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ·∫∫ª°µ

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious

damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

°Õπ°“√‡™Õ¡µÕ: µ√«®¥°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø„π√∂¬πµ„À≈–‡Õ¬¥∂∂«π ‡æ√“–°“√‡™Õ¡µÕ∑º¥æ≈“¥Õ“®∑”„À‡°¥§«“¡‡ ¬À“¬

√“¬·√ßµÕ™¥ª√–°Õ∫™¥π‰¥

“¬µ–°«¢Õß “¬‰ø·≈–¢ÕßÕ

1 µÕ “¬‰ø µ“¡≈”¥∫∑√–∫

2 ‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫“¬Õ“°“»

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

ÿ¥∑“¬ µÕ «π§«∫§ÿ¡°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø‡¢“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫™ÿ¥π

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

Rear line out (see diagram

)

Rear ground terminal

“¬ ≠≠“≥ÕÕ°¥“πÀ≈ß (¥·ºπ¿¡

)

®ÿ¥‡™Õ¡µÕ “¬¥π¥“πÀ≈ß

15 A fuse

ø« ¢π“¥ 15 A

Antenna terminal

¢« “¬Õ“°“»

Ignition switch

«∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥

Black

¥”

To the metallic body or chassis of the car

µÕ°∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√Õ‡™ ´ ¢Õß√∂¬πµ

Yellow *²

‡À≈Õß *²

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery

(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

µÕ°∫¢«∑¡°√–· ‰øø“„π·ºßø« ´ßµÕ°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ

( ‚¥¬‰¡µÕß„™ «∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥) (12 ‚«≈∑§ß∑)

Fuse block

Red

·¥ß

·ºßø«

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

µÕ°∫¢« «πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø«

Blue

»ø“

To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)

‡ “Õ“°“»‰øø“Õµ‚π¡µ À“°¡ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 250 mA)

Blue with white stripe

π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)

µÕ‡¢“°∫Õª°√≥Õπ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 200 mA)

White with black stripe

White

Gray with black stripe

Gray

Green with black stripe

Green

Purple with black stripe

Purple

¢“«·∂∫¥”

¢“«

‡∑“·∂∫¥”

‡∑“

‡¢¬«·∂∫¥”

‡¢¬«

¡«ß·∂∫¥”

¡«ß

Left speaker (front)

Right speaker (front)

Left speaker (rear)

Right speaker (rear)

≈”‚æß´“¬ (Àπ“)

≈”‚æß¢«“ (Àπ“)

≈”‚æß´“¬ (À≈ß)

≈”‚æß¢«“ (À≈ß)

*¹‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π

Not supplied for this unit.

*²°Õπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™

ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π°Õπ∑®–µ¥µß µÕßµÕ “¬µ–°«π°Õπ

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the

power cannot be turned on.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ‡§√Õß¢¬“¬‡ ¬ß¿“¬πÕ°

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it

can be controlled through this unit.

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker

leads of this unit unused.

≥ “¡“√Õ∂µ°∫·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√ ‡æÕ‡æ¡§

≥ ¿“æ¬‡ß„À°∫√–∫∫ ‡µÕ√‚Õ¢Õß√∂¬πµ

ª°√Õ≥π Ê ‡æÕ®– “¡“√∂§«∫§ ¡‚¥ÿ¬™¥ª√–

• µÕ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈ ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«) ‡¢“°∫ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈¢ÕßÕ

°Õ∫π‰¥

• ∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°™

¥ª√–°Õ∫π·≈«µÕ‡¢“°∫‡§√Õß¢¬“¬ ∑ß “¬µ–°«≈”‚æß¢Õß™ ¥ª√–°Õ∫‰«π

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Remote lead

“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°•

¢ÕµÕ√ªµ« Y ( ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ ¥ª√–°Õ∫)π

Remote lead (blue with white stripe)

“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°• ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«)

Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 15 of the

INSTRUCTIONS.)

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic

antenna if any

µß§“ “L/O MODE” ‡ªπ “REAR” (¥Àπ“ 15

µÕ “¬°∫Õ ª°√Õ≥πÀ√Õ‡ “Õ“°“»Õµ‚π¡µ∂“¡

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

§”·π–π”)

“¬‡§‡∫≈ ≠≠“≥ ( ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

¥ª√–°Õ∫)π

Rear speakers

JVC Amplifier

≈”‚æßÀ≈ß

‡§√Õß¢¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC

Set “L/O MODE” to “SUB.W” (See page 15 of the

INSTRUCTIONS.)

Front speakers

≈”‚æßÀπ“

µß§“ “L/O MODE” ‡ªπ “SUB.W” (¥Àπ“ 15 §”·π–π”)

Remote lead

“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°•

Subwoofer

JVC Amplifier

‡§√Õß¢¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC

À√Õ

´∫«ø‡øÕ√

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint

(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

µÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π„À·ππ‡¢“°∫µ«∂ß‡À≈° À√Õµ«∂ß√∂

—µ√ß «π ∑‰¡¡ ‡§≈Õ∫ (À“°¡ ‡§≈Õ∫Õ¬ „À¢¥ ÕÕ°°Õπ °ÕπµÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π)

À“°‰¡ªØ∫µµ“¡§”·π–π”π ‡§√ÕßÕ“®™”√ ¥ÕÀ‡√ ¬À“¬‰¥

TROUBLESHOOTING

• The fuse blows.

°“√µ√«® Õ∫ª≠À“¢¥¢Õß

• ø« ¢“¥

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ¥”·≈– ·¥ßÕ¬“ß∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡

• Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

• ‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õß‰¥

* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ‡À≈ÕßÀ√Õ‰¡

• No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• ‰¡¡‡ ¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß

* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æß‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√À√Õ‰¡

• Sound is distorted.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• ‡ ¬ß‡æ¬π

* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ß¥πÀ√Õ‰¡

* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æß¥“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡

• Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

• ‡ ¬ß√∫°«π

* ¡°“√„™ “¬ πÊ À√ÕÀπ“Ê µÕ®“°‡§√Õß «π∑µ¥µß ‰«∫πæπ¥“πÀ≈ß°∫µ«∂ß√∂¬πµÀ√Õ‰¡

• This unit becomes hot.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• ™ ¥ª√–°ÕÕ∫π√¢π

* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ß¥πÀ√Õ‰¡

* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æß¥“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

• ‡§√Õß√∫π∑”ß“π‰¡

* ∑“π‰¥µß‡§√Õß„À¡·≈«À√Õ¬ß

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indesit Washer WITL 85 User Manual
InFocus Projector C105 User Manual
Intel Laptop P8010 User Manual
Jenn Air Convection Oven JMW3430 User Manual
Jenn Air Refrigerator SKUS User Manual
JVC Car Stereo System KW XC899 User Manual
JVC Speaker TH BA1 User Manual
Kenwood Two Way Radio TK 2106Z User Manual
KitchenAid Dishwasher KUDD01DP User Manual
Kodak Scanner A 61171_XX User Manual